Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/

SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S

Service Manual

Manual Code: C120-E682-11EN

March 2015
Copyright © 2007, 2015, Fujitsu Limited. All rights reserved.
Oracle and/or its affiliates provided technical input and review on portions of this material.
Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited each own or control intellectual property rights relating to products and technology described in this document, and such products,
technology and this document are protected by copyright laws, patents, and other intellectual property laws and international treaties.
This document and the product and technology to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of such
product or technology, or of this document, may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited, and
their applicable licensors, if any. The furnishings of this document to you does not give you any rights or licenses, express or implied, with respect to the product or technology to
which it pertains, and this document does not contain or represent any commitment of any kind on the part of Oracle or Fujitsu Limited or any affiliate of either of them.
This document and the product and technology described in this document may incorporate third-party intellectual property copyrighted by and/or licensed from the suppliers to
Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited, including software and font technology.
Per the terms of the GPL or LGPL, a copy of the source code governed by the GPL or LGPL, as applicable, is available upon request by the End User. Please contact Oracle and/or its
affiliates or Fujitsu Limited. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the
University of California.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited.
SPARC Enterprise, SPARC64, SPARC64 logo and all SPARC trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and other
countries and used under license.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered
to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such,
use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Disclaimer: The only warranties granted by Oracle and Fujitsu Limited, and/or any affiliate in connection with this document or any product or technology described herein are those
expressly set forth in the license agreement pursuant to which the product or technology is provided.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN SUCH AGREEMENT, ORACLE OR FUJITSU LIMITED, AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIE
S OF ANY KIND (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED) REGARDING SUCH PRODUCT OR TECHNOLOGY OR THIS DOCUMENT, WHICH ARE ALL PROVIDED AS IS, AND ALL EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Unless otherwise expressly set forth in such agreement, to the extent allowed by applicable law, in no event shall Oracle or Fujitsu Limited, and/or any of their affiliates have any
liability to any third party under any legal theory for any loss of revenues or profits, loss of use or data, or business interruptions, or for any indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Copyright © 2007, 2015, Fujitsu Limited. Tous droits réservés.
Oracle et/ou ses affiliés ont fourni et vérifié des données techniques de certaines parties de ce composant.
Oracle et/ou ses affiliés et Fujitsu Limited détiennent et contrôlent chacun des droits de propriété intellectuelle relatifs aux produits et technologies décrits dans ce document. De
même, ces produits, technologies et ce document sont protégés par des lois sur le droit d’auteur, des brevets, et d'autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle et des traités internationaux.
Ce document, le produit et les technologies afférents sont exclusivement distribués avec des licences qui en restreignent l'utilisation, la copie, la distribution et la décompilation.
Aucune partie de ce produit, de ces technologies ou de ce document ne peut être reproduite sous quelque forme que ce soit, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite
préalable d'Oracle et/ou ses affiliés et de Fujitsu Limited, et de leurs éventuels concédants de licence. Ce document, bien qu'il vous ait été fourni, ne vous confère aucun droit et
aucune licence, exprès ou tacites, concernant le produit ou la technologie auxquels il se rapporte. Par ailleurs, il ne contient ni ne représente aucun engagement, de quelque type que
ce soit, de la part d'Oracle ou de Fujitsu Limited, ou des sociétés affiliées de l'une ou l'autre entité.
Ce document, ainsi que les produits et technologies qu'il décrit, peuvent inclure des droits de propriété intellectuelle de parties tierces protégés par le droit d’auteur et/ou cédés sous
licence par des fournisseurs à Oracle et/ou ses sociétés affiliées et Fujitsu Limited, y compris des logiciels et des technologies relatives aux polices de caractères.
Conformément aux conditions de la licence GPL ou LGPL, une copie du code source régi par la licence GPL ou LGPL, selon le cas, est disponible sur demande par l'Utilisateur Final.
Veuillez contacter Oracle et/ou ses affiliés ou Fujitsu Limited. Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants développés par des parties tierces. Des parties de ce produit
pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l'Université de Californie.
UNIX est une marque déposée de The OpenGroup.
Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés.
Fujitsu et le logo Fujitsu sont des marques déposées de Fujitsu Limited.
SPARC Enterprise, SPARC64, le logo SPARC64 et toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc., aux Etats-Unis et
dans d'autres pays.
Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs.
Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l'accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logiciel ou l'utilise pour le
compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s'applique :
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered
to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such,
use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Avis de non-responsabilité : les seules garanties octroyées par Oracle et Fujitsu Limited et/ou toute société affiliée de l'une ou l'autre entité en rapport avec ce document ou tout
produit ou toute technologie décrits dans les présentes correspondent aux garanties expressément stipulées dans le contrat de licence régissant le produit ou la technologie fournis.
SAUF MENTION CONTRAIRE EXPRESSEMENT STIPULEE AU DIT CONTRAT, ORACLE OU FUJITSU LIMITED ET/OU LES SOCIETES AFFILIEES A L'UNE OU L'AUTRE
ENTITE DECLINENT TOUT ENGAGEMENT OU GARANTIE, QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA NATURE (EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE) CONCERNANT CE PRODUIT, CETTE
TECHNOLOGIE OU CE DOCUMENT, LESQUELS SONT FOURNIS EN L'ETAT. EN OUTRE, TOUTES LES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU
TACITES, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L'APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A
L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON, SONT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE. Sauf mention contraire expressément stipulée dans ce contrat,
dans la mesure autorisée par la loi applicable, en aucun cas Oracle ou Fujitsu Limited et/ou l'une ou l'autre de leurs sociétés affiliées ne sauraient être tenues responsables envers une
quelconque partie tierce, sous quelque théorie juridique que ce soit, de tout manque à gagner ou de perte de profit, de problèmes d'utilisation ou de perte de données, ou
d'interruptions d'activités, ou de tout dommage indirect, spécial, secondaire ou consécutif, même si ces entités ont été préalablement informées d'une telle éventualité.
LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE "EN L'ETAT" ET TOUTE AUTRE CONDITION, DECLARATION ET GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, EST FORMELLEMENT
EXCLUE, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI EN VIGUEUR, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE,
A L'APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON.
Contents

Preface xi
Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 1
1.1 Warning/Caution Indications 1
1.2 Warning Labels 2
1.3 Labels/Tags 2
1.4 Safety Precautions 4
1.5 Precautions on Static Electricity 5
1.6 Other Precautions 6
1.7 Emergency Power Off 7
Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 9
2.1 Identifying the Names and Locations of Components 9
2.2 Checking the Memory Configuration Rules 13
2.2.1 Memory installation rules 14
2.2.2 Checking memory information 17
2.3 Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel 18
2.3.1 Display function of the operation panel 20
2.3.2 Control function of the operation panel 21
2.4 Checking the LED Indications 24
2.4.1 Operation panel LEDs 24
2.4.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator) 25
2.4.3 LEDs on each component 26

iii
 2.5 Confirming the Types of Cable 29
2.5.1 Types of cable 29
2.5.2 Cable connection ports 30
Chapter 3 Types of Maintenance 31
3.1 Types of Maintenance Supported in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S 31
3.2 Active Maintenance 32
3.3 Inactive Maintenance 33
3.4 System-stopped Maintenance 34
Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 35
4.1 Confirming the System Configuration 35
4.1.1 Confirming the hardware configuration 35
4.1.2 Confirming the software and firmware configurations 36
4.1.3 Confirming the FRU information and resource information 37
4.2 Troubleshooting 38
4.2.1 Determining the causes of failures 38
4.2.2 Identifying a failure 39
4.2.3 Downloading error log information 45
4.3 Maintenance Precautions 45
4.3.1 Precautions for replacement 45
4.3.2 Precautions for installation 47
4.3.3 Precautions for reduction 48
Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 51
5.1 Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance 51
5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode 52
5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status 52
5.3.1 Checking the operating condition of the physical partition or
logical domain 52
5.3.2 Checking the assignment status of I/O devices 53
5.3.3 Checking the usage status of the internal disk 54
5.4 Preparations for Enabling Active Maintenance 54
5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices 55

iv Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 5.4.2 Enabling the removal of an I/O device 61
5.4.3 Releasing a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical
partition 69
5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance 71
5.6 Stopping the Entire System 73
5.6.1 Stopping the system with the XSCF command 73
5.6.2 Stopping the system from the operation panel 75
5.7 Saving XSCF Setting Information 75
5.8 Releasing a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S FRU from the System with the
replacefru Command 76
5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a
system with a building block configuration) 76
5.8.2 Releasing of the power supply unit and fan unit of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S 78
5.9 Accessing an FRU 80
5.9.1 Removing the crossbar cables from the cable support 80
5.9.2 Lowering the cable support 83
5.9.3 Lowering the cable support (if it is a new model) 84
5.9.4 Removing the power cord 86
5.9.5 Removing the front cover 87
Chapter 6 Restoring the System 89
6.1 Restoring the Chassis 89
6.1.1 Installing the power cord 89
6.1.2 Fixing the cable support 90
6.1.3 Fixing the cable support (if it is a new model) 91
6.1.4 Attaching the crossbar cables to the cable support 92
6.1.5 Installing the front cover 93
6.2 Incorporating a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S FRU into the System with the
replacefru Command 94
6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a
system with a building block configuration) 94

Contents v
 6.2.2 Incorporation of the power supply unit and fan unit of the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S 96
6.3 Diagnosing a Replacement FRU 98
6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board 98
6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables 99
6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance 99
6.4 Restoring XSCF Setting Information 100
6.5 Incorporating a Chassis and I/O Device into a Physical Partition 101
6.5.1 Incorporating a chassis into a physical partition 101
6.5.2 Incorporating an I/O device 103
6.5.3 Restoring a logical domain to the pre-maintenance state 106
6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode 113
6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance 113
6.8 Starting the Entire System 114
6.8.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command 114
6.8.2 Starting the system from the operation panel 114
Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 117
7.1 Maintenance Workflow 117
7.2 FRU Replacement Workflow 120
7.2.1 Active replacement 120
7.2.2 Inactive replacement 129
7.2.3 System-stopped replacement 137
7.3 FRU Installation Workflow 146
7.3.1 Active addition 146
7.3.2 Inactive addition 152
7.3.3 System-stopped addition 157
7.4 FRU Removal Workflow 163
7.4.1 Active removal 164
7.4.2 Inactive removal 169
7.4.3 System-stopped removal 174
Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 181

vi Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 8.1 Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card 181
8.2 PCI Express Card Configuration 181
8.3 FRU Removal and Installation Flow 183
8.4 Removing a PCI Express Card 184
8.4.1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette 184
8.4.2 Removing a PCI Express card 186
8.4.3 Installing a PCI Express card filler 189
8.5 Installing a PCI Express Card 191
8.5.1 Installing a PCI Express card 191
8.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card filler 193
8.5.3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette 193
Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 195
9.1 Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit/Memory 195
9.2 Configuration of the CPU Memory Unit and Memory 196
9.2.1 Configuration of the CPU Memory Unit 196
9.2.2 Memory Configuration 197
9.3 Maintenance Precautions 198
9.4 FRU Removal and Installation Flow 198
9.5 Removing a CPU Memory Unit 202
9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit 203
9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis 204
9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper 205
9.6 Installing a PCI Express Cable 213
9.7 Switching the microSD Card 246
9.8 Removing Memory 250
9.9 Installing Memory 252
9.10 Installing a CPU Memory Unit 252
9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper 252
9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis 263
Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks 265
10.1 Before Maintaining an Internal Disk 265

Contents vii
 10.2 Configuration of the Internal Disks 265
10.3 FRU Removal and Installation Flow 266
10.4 Removing an Internal Disk 267
10.5 Installing an Internal Disk 270
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 273
11.1 Before Maintaining a Fan Unit 273
11.2 Configuration of the Fan Units 273
11.3 Removing a Fan Unit 274
11.4 Installing a Fan Unit 275
Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 277
12.1 Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit 277
12.2 Configuration of the Power Supply Units 277
12.3 Removing a Power Supply Unit 278
12.4 Installing a Power Supply Unit 279
Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 281
13.1 Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 281
13.2 Locations of the PSU Backplane Unit and Operation Panel 281
13.3 Maintenance Precautions 283
13.4 FRU Removal and Installation Flow 284
13.5 Removing the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 285
13.5.1 Removing the PSU backplane unit 285
13.5.2 Removing the operation panel 287
13.6 Installing the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 288
13.6.1 Installing the operation panel 288
13.6.2 Installing the PSU backplane unit 289
Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables 291
14.1 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable 291
14.2 Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables 291
14.3 Removing the Crossbar Cables 295
14.4 Installing the Crossbar Cables 297
Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 299

viii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 15.1 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit 299
15.2 Configuration of the Crossbar Units 299
15.3 Removing a Crossbar Unit 300
15.4 Installing a Crossbar Unit 302
Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 305
16.1 Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable 305
16.2 Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables 305
16.3 Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable 307
16.4 Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable 308
Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 311
17.1 Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 311
17.2 Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports 311
17.3 Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 313
17.4 Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 314
Appendix A Component List 315
Appendix B Component Specifications 317
B.1 CPU Memory Unit 317
B.2 Crossbar Unit 318
B.3 Power Supply Unit 318
B.4 Fan Unit 319
B.5 Internal Disk Drive 319
B.6 PCI Express Card 320
B.7 Backplanes 320
B.8 Operation Panel 322
Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 323
C.1 iostat(1M) Command 323
C.2 prtdiag(1M) Command 325
C.3 prtconf(1M) Command 328
C.4 netstat(1M) Command 331
C.5 ping(1M) Command 332
C.6 ps(1) Command 333

Contents ix
 C.7 prstat(1M) Command 335
Appendix D External Interface Specifications 337
D.1 Serial Port 337
D.1.1 Wire connection chart for serial cables 338
D.2 USB Port 338
D.3 SAS Port 339
D.4 RESET Switch 339
Index 341

x Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Preface

This document describes the maintenance procedure for Oracle or Fujitsu SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S. The maintenance work should be performed by service engineers
and/or field engineers.
See the Crossbar Box for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Service Manual for the
procedures for maintaining the crossbar box.
Fujitsu M10 is sold as SPARC M10 Systems by Fujitsu in Japan.
Fujitsu M10 and SPARC M10 Systems are identical products.
The preface includes the following sections:
■ Audience
■ Related Documentation
■ Text Conventions
■ Notes on Safety
■ Syntax of the Command-Line Interface (CLI)
■ Document Feedback

Audience
This document is intended for service engineers and field engineers who perform
maintenance work on the system.

xi
 Related Documentation
All documents for your server are available online at the following locations.
■ Sun Oracle software-related documents (Oracle Solaris, etc.)
http://www.oracle.com/documentation/
■ Fujitsu documents
Japanese site
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/sparc/manual/
Global site
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/server/sparc/downloads/manual/

The following table lists documents related to SPARC M10 Systems.

Documentation Related to SPARC M10 Systems (*1)

Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Getting Started Guide (*2)

Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Quick Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Important Legal and Safety Information (*2)
Software License Conditions for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Safety and Compliance Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Security Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems/SPARC Enterprise/PRIMEQUEST Common Installation Planning Manual
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide
Fujitsu M10-1/SPARC M10-1 Service Manual
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual
Crossbar Box for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Service Manual
PCI Expansion Unit for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Service Manual
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems XSCF Reference Manual
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems RCIL User Guide (*3)
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems XSCF MIB and Trap Lists
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Product Notes
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Glossary
*1 The listed manuals are subject to change without notice.
*2 Printed manuals are provided with the product.
*3 This document applies specifically to the SPARC M10 and FUJITSU ETERNUS disk storage system.

xii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Text Conventions
This manual uses the following fonts and symbols to express specific types of
information.

Font/Symbol Meaning Example

AaBbCc123 What you type, when contrasted with on-screen XSCF> adduser jsmith
computer output.
This font is used to indicate an example of
command input.
AaBbCc123 The names of commands, files, and directories; XSCF> showuser -P
on-screen computer output. User Name: jsmith
This font is used to indicate an example of Privileges: useradm
command input in the frame. auditadm
Italic Indicates the name of a reference manual. See the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems Installation Guide.
"" Indicates the names of chapters, sections, items, See "Chapter 2 Network Connection."
buttons, or menus.

Command syntax in the text

While the XSCF commands have a section number of (8) or (1), it is omitted from the
text.
The Oracle Solaris commands have a section number such as (1M) in the text.
Each command has a section number in a command name to prompt users to refer to
it.

Notes on Safety
Read the following documents thoroughly before using or handling any SPARC M10
Systems.
■ Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Important Legal and Safety Information
■ Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Safety and Compliance Guide

Preface xiii
 Syntax of the Command-Line Interface
(CLI)
The command syntax is as follows:
■ A variable that requires the input of a value must be put in Italics.
■ An optional element must be enclosed in [].
■ A group of options for an optional keyword must be enclosed in [] and delimited
by |.

Document Feedback
If you have any comments or requests regarding this document, please take a
moment to share it with us by indicating the manual code, manual title, and page,
and stating your points specifically through the following websites:
■ Japanese site
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/sparc/manual/
■ Global site
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/server/sparc/downloads/manual/

xiv Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 1

Before Starting Maintenance Work

This chapter describes the safety precautions that must be observed before starting
any maintenance work.
Note the meanings of each of the following symbols and labels to ensure that the
work is done correctly.
■ Warning/Caution Indications
■ Warning Labels
■ Labels/Tags
■ Safety Precautions
■ Precautions on Static Electricity
■ Other Precautions
■ Emergency Power Off

1.1 Warning/Caution Indications

This manual uses the following conventions to indicate warning and alert messages,
which are intended to prevent injury to the user and others as well as damage to
property.

Warning - "WARNING" indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or

serious personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly.

Caution - "CAUTION" indicates a potential hazard that could result in minor or

moderate personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. This
also indicates that damage to the unit or other property may occur if the user does
not perform the procedure correctly.

1
1.2 Warning Labels
Observe the warning labels (A in the figure) affixed on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
during the maintenance work.

Caution - Never peel off the labels.

Figure 1-1 Location of warning labels

A A

1.3 Labels/Tags
This section describes the labels and tags attached to the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
For warning labels, see "1.2 Warning Labels."

Note - The contents of the labels and tags may differ from those that are actually affixed.

■ The system name plate label (A in Figure 1-2) describes the model number, serial
number, manufacture date, rated voltage/current, number of phases, frequency,
and weight for maintenance and management.
■ The standard label (B in Figure 1-2) describes the following certification standards.
■ Safety: NRTL/C
■ Radio wave: VCCI-A, FCC-A, DOC-A, and KCC
■ Safety and radio wave: CE, BSMI, RCM, and EAC

2 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Figure 1-2 Location of the system name plate label and standard label

■ The RFID tag (Figure 1-3) carries an Asset ID. The RFID tag of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S is affixed on the front cover.

Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 3

 Figure 1-3 RFID tag

1.4 Safety Precautions

Observe the following precautions to protect yourself when performing maintenance.
■ Observe all the precautions, warnings, and instructions described on the chassis.
■ Do not insert foreign objects into the openings in the chassis. Any such foreign
object could come into contact with high-voltage circuitry or could short circuit
the components, causing a fire or an electric shock.
■ Contact a service engineer to inspect the chassis.

4 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Safety precautions on electricity
■ Confirm that the voltage and frequency of your input power supply match the
electric rating described on the system name plate label affixed on the chassis.
■ Wear a wrist strap when handling a hard disk drive, CPU memory unit, or other
printed boards.
■ Use grounded power outlets.
■ Do not attempt to make any mechanical or electrical modifications. Fujitsu shall
not be responsible for the regulatory compliance of a chassis that has been modified.

Rack-related safety precautions

■ The racks should be fixed on the floor, ceiling, or the adjacent frame.
■ The racks may be supplied with a quakeresistant options kit. The use of the
quakeresistant options kit prevents the racks from falling over during installation
or maintenance service on the chassis.
■ Prior to installation or maintenance, a safety assessment should be conducted by a
service engineer in the following cases:
■ When the quakeresistant options kit is not supplied and the rack is not fixed on
the floor with bolts: Check for the safety such as whether the rack should not
fall over.
■ If multiple chassis are mounted in a rack, perform maintenance for each of the
chassis.
For details of the racks, see "Chapter 2 Planning and Preparing for System
Installation" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide.

1.5 Precautions on Static Electricity

Observe the precautions concerning the electrostatic discharge (ESD) as described in
Table 1-1 to ensure the safety of personnel and the system.

Table 1-1 ESD precautions

Item Precaution

Wrist strap Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed boards.
ESD mat An approved ESD mat provides protection from static damage
when used together with a wrist strap. The mat also acts as a
cushion to protect the small parts that are attached to printed
boards.
Antistatic bag/ After removing a printed board or component, place it in the
ESD safe packaging box antistatic bag or ESD safe packaging box.

Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 5

 How to use a wrist strap
Wear a wrist strap in such a way that the inner metal surface (A in the figure) of the
wrist strap band is in contact with your skin. Connect the clip (B in the figure)
directly to the chassis.

Caution - Do not connect the wrist strap clip to the ESD mat. By connecting the wrist
strap clip to the chassis, the operator and components have the same electrical
potential, thus eliminating the danger of static damage.

Figure 1-4 Wrist strap connection destination

1.6 Other Precautions

■ The printed boards in a chassis can be easily damaged by static electricity. To
prevent damage to printed boards, wear a wrist strap and ground it to the chassis
prior to starting maintenance.
■ When mounting any component in the chassis, check the connectors on both of the
chassis and component beforehand to confirm that none of the pins are bent and
that all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a component is mounted with a
bent pin in a connector, the chassis or component may be damaged. Also, carefully
proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent.

6 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 ■ If excessive force is applied to the CPU memory unit, the components mounted on
printed boards may be damaged. When handling the CPU memory unit, observe
the following precautions:
■ Hold the CPU memory unit by the metal frame.
■ When removing the CPU memory unit from the packaging, keep the CPU
memory unit horizontal until you lay it on the cushioned ESD mat.
■ Connectors and components on the CPU memory unit have thin pins that bend
easily. Therefore, do not place the CPU memory unit on a hard surface.
■ Be careful not to damage the small parts located on both sides of the CPU
memory unit.
■ The heat sinks can be damaged by incorrect handling. Do not touch the heat sinks
with your hands or other objects while replacing or removing CPU memory units.
If a heat sink is disconnected or broken, obtain a replacement CPU memory unit.
When storing or carrying a CPU memory unit, ensure that the heat sinks are
sufficiently protected.
■ When removing a cable such as the LAN cable, if you cannot reach the latch lock
of the connector, use a flat headed screwdriver etc. to push the latch and release
the cable. If you use force to remove the cable, the LAN port of the CPU memory
unit or the PCI Express (PCIe) cards may be damaged.
■ Do not use any power cord other than the specified one.

1.7 Emergency Power Off

This section describes the procedure for powering off the system in an emergency.

Caution - In an emergency (such as smoke or flames coming from the chassis),

immediately stop using the unit and turn off the power supply. Regardless of the
operation you are performing, give top priority to fire prevention.

1. Remove all the power cords from the power supply units.

Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 7

 Figure 1-5 Removing the power cords

8 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Chapter 2

Understanding the System

Components

This section describes the components mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.

It is necessary to confirm and fully understand the configurations of the components
mounted in the chassis as well as the LED indications before starting any maintenance
work.
■ Identifying the Names and Locations of Components
■ Checking the Memory Configuration Rules
■ Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel
■ Checking the LED Indications
■ Confirming the Types of Cable
For the specifications of each component, see "Appendix B Component Specifications."

2.1 Identifying the Names and Locations of

Components
This section describes the names and locations of the components mounted in the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.

Components that can be accessed from the front

You can access the fan unit and power supply unit only after removing the front
cover.

9
 Figure 2-1 Location of components that can be accessed from the front

(1)

(2) (3)

Location number Component

1 Fan unit
2 Internal disk
3 Power supply unit

10 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Components that can be accessed from the rear

Figure 2-2 Location of components that can be accessed from the rear

(1) (2)

Location number Component

1 PCI-Express (PCIe) card cassette

2 Crossbar unit (Only for the SPARC M10-4S. The SPARC M10-4
incorporates three PCIe card cassettes.)

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 11

 Internal components
To access internal components, remove the CPU memory unit from the chassis.

Figure 2-3 Locations of internal components

(3)
(1)
(3)
(2)

(4)

(5)

12 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Figure 2-4 CPU memory unit removed from the chassis

(1)

(2)

Location number Component

1 CPU memory unit upper

2 CPU memory unit lower
3 Memory (CPU memory unit upper)
4 PSU backplane unit
5 Operation panel

Note - Two CPUs are directly installed on each of the CPU memory unit upper and CPU
memory unit lower. Thus you cannot replace the CPUs individually.

2.2 Checking the Memory Configuration

Rules
This section describes the memory installation rules and the method for checking

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 13

 memory information.

2.2.1 Memory installation rules

Install the memory in accordance with the following rules:
■ Install the memory in units of eight modules.
■ When the memory is mounted in units of eight modules, all of the memory
modules must be of the same capacity and rank.
■ The mounted memory must correspond to each CPU. For the memory for one
CPU, use only R-DIMM (Registered DIMM: 8 GB/16 GB/32 GB) or only LR-DIMM
(Load Reduced DIMM: 64 GB).
■ You can mount memory modules of different capacities in the same system.
However, when memory modules of 512 GB (64 GB DIMM x 8) are mounted in
the 16 DIMM slots under a CPU, memory modules of different capacities cannot
be mounted together with them. For uniformity, be sure to use only memory
modules of 512 GB (64 GB DIMM x 8).
■ First mount memory group A and then mount memory group B.
■ To use the memory mirror function, mount eight DIMMs of the same capacity/
rank in each of memory group A and memory group B.
Figure 2-5 shows the mounting locations of all the memory modules. Each
eight-module unit of mounted memory is indicated by letters a to f. Table 2-1, Table
2-2 and Table 2-3 list the supported memory installation configurations. The memory
mounting locations may vary depending on the number of mounted CPU memory
units. Refer to this figure and table when you expand or reduce memory.
As for the mounting order of memory group B, give priority to using a uniform
memory type of either R-DIMM or LR-DIMM for one CPU over the memory
mounting patterns in Table 2-1, Table 2-2, and Table 2-3.
You can set memory for each CPU when configuring memory in the mirror
configuration. In such a case, mount all the memory in group A and group B for the
corresponding CPU. Figure 2-5 shows a combination of mirrored memory in a unit of
eight modules on each of the right and left sides.
For example, in the memory on the right side of CMUL CPU#0 in Figure 2-5, the
four-module set of MEM#00B, MEM#00A, MEM#01B, and MEM#01A mirrors the
four-module set of MEM#04B, MEM#04A, MEM#05B, and MEM#05A.

14 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 MEM#15A MEM#07A MEM#15A MEM#07A
CMUL

CMUU
MEM#15B MEM#07B MEM#15B MEM#07B
Figure 2-5

MEM#14A MEM#06A MEM#14A MEM#06A

MEM#14B MEM#06B MEM#14B MEM#06B
MEM#11A MEM#03A MEM#11A MEM#03A
Mirroring

MEM#11B MEM#03B MEM#11B MEM#03B

MEM#10A MEM#02A MEM#10A MEM#02A
MEM#10B MEM#02B MEM#10B MEM#02B

d
b
a

h
g
e

Front
Front

CPU#1
CPU#0
CPU#1
CPU#0

Chapter 2
MEM#12B MEM#00B MEM#12B MEM#00B
MEM#12A MEM#00A MEM#12A MEM#00A
Mounting locations and units of memory

MEM#13B MEM#01B MEM#13B MEM#01B

MEM#13A MEM#01A MEM#13A MEM#01A
MEM#16B MEM#04B MEM#16B MEM#04B
Mirroring

MEM#16A MEM#04A MEM#16A MEM#04A

MEM#17B MEM#05B MEM#17B MEM#05B
MEM#17A MEM#05A MEM#17A MEM#05A

Understanding the System Components

15
 When only the CPU memory unit lower is mounted

Table 2-1 Memory mounting configurations (CMUL only)

Number of memory Mounted memory
modules

8 a in Figure 2-3 - - -
16 a in Figure 2-3 b in Figure 2-3 - -
24 a in Figure 2-3 b in Figure 2-3 e in Figure 2-3 -
32 a in Figure 2-3 b in Figure 2-3 e in Figure 2-3 f in Figure 2-3

When both the CPU memory unit lower and the CPU memory unit upper
are mounted

Table 2-2 Memory mounting patterns (CMUL and CMUU)

Number of Mounted memory
memory
modules

8 a in - - - - - - -
Figure 2-3
16 a in b in - - - - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
24 a in b in c in - - - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
32 a in b in c in d in - - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
40 a in b in c in d in e in - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
48 a in b in c in d in e in f in Figure - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3
56 a in b in c in d in e in f in Figure g in -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3 Figure 2-3
64 a in b in c in d in e in f in Figure g in h in
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3

When expanding a CPU memory unit upper to a chassis in which only a

CPU memory unit lower is mounted
If you mount memory by expanding a CPU memory unit upper to a chassis in which
only a CPU memory unit lower is mounted, you do not have to remove the memory
mounted on the CPU memory unit lower.

16 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Install it by observing the mounting configurations shown in either Table 2-3or Table
2-2.

Table 2-3 Memory mounting configurations (CMUL and expanded CMUU)

Number of Mounted memory
memory
modules

8 a in -
Figure 2-3
16 a in b in - - - - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
24 a in b in e in - - - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
32 a in b in e in f in Figure - - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3
40 a in b in e in f in Figure c in - - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3 Figure 2-3
48 a in b in e in f in Figure c in d in - -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
56 a in b in e in f in Figure c in d in g in -
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3
64 a in b in e in f in Figure c in d in g in h in
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3

2.2.2 Checking memory information

Check the type and size of the memory by using the showhardconf command of the
XSCF firmware.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the showhardconf command to check the memory information.
The capacity and rank of the memory are displayed.

XSCF> showhardconf
------------------------Omitted------------------------
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Slave; Ver:2003h; Serial:2081231002;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ;
+ Power_Supply_System:Single;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123002Z4 ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 A8 ;
+ Memory_Size:128 GB; Type: B ;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00010448;
+ Freq:3.700 GHz; Type:0x20;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00010418;

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 17

 + Freq:3.700 GHz; Type:0x20;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YK0 0000-85D0AD54;
+ Type:01; Size:4 GB;
MEM#01A Status:Normal;
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YK0 0000-85D0AD67;
+ Type:01; Size:4 GB;
------------------------Omitted-----------------------

Figure 2-6 How to read the memory information

MEM#00A Status:Normal;
Memory slot
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DHO-YH9 0000-83AE9A65;

+ Type:04; Size:8 GB;

Capacity and rank
04: R-DIMM (8GB 1rank)
07: R-DIMM (16GB 2rank)
09: R-DIMM (32GB 4rank)
47: LR-DIMM (64GB 8rank)

2.3 Confirming the Functions of the

Operation Panel
This section describes the functions of the operation panel mounted on the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S.
The operation panel provides the system's display and control functions. The field
engineer and system administrator can specify the operation mode or control
start/stop of the system while checking the LEDs indicating the system operation
status.

Note - In a building block configuration with a crossbar box connected, only the operation
panel of the crossbar box that is the master XSCF can have all the operation panel functions
enabled.

18 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Figure 2-7 Location of the operation panel

Figure 2-8 Appearance of operation panel

㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀
㩿㪊㪀

㩿㪋㪀 㩿㪌㪀 㩿㪍㪀

Location number Component

1 POWER LED

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 19

 Location number Component

2 XSCF STANDBY LED

3 CHECK LED
4 BB-ID switch (SPARC M10-4S only)
5 Mode switch
6 Power switch

For a building block configuration, an operation panel is mounted in each chassis of

the SPARC M10-4S. However, the only operation panel on which all of the LEDs and
switches are enabled is that of the chassis housing the master XSCF.
Table 2-4 shows the display and operation status of the operation panel.

Table 2-4 Display and operation status of operation panel

LEDs/switches on SPARC M10-4S is master XSCF SPARC M10-4S is not master XSCF
operation panel

POWER LED Enabled (Indicates the start/stop state of the Enabled (Indicates the start/stop state of the
SPARC M10-4S) SPARC M10-4S)
XSCF STANDBY Enabled (Displays the XSCF status of the Enabled (Displays the XSCF status of the
LED system) SPARC M10-4S)
CHECK LED Enabled (Indicates the SPARC M10-4S error Enabled (Indicates the SPARC M10-4S error
state) state)
BB-ID switch Enabled (Registers a BB-ID number) Enabled (Registers a BB-ID number)
Mode switch (*1) Enabled (Mode operation of the system) Disabled
Power switch Enabled (Start/stop operation of the system) Disabled
*1 Set the same mode for the SPARC M10-4S systems with the master XSCF and the XSCF in the standby state. If the settings are different,
an asterisk (*) is displayed beside the components in the output of the showhardconf or showstatus command.

2.3.1 Display function of the operation panel

The operation panel has three LED indicators as a display function. The LED
indicators indicate the following. For details, see "2.4.1 Operation panel LEDs."
■ General system status
■ System error warning
■ System error location

20 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Figure 2-9 Operation panel LEDs

㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀
㩿㪊㪀

Location number Component

1 POWER LED
2 XSCF STANDBY LED
3 CHECK LED

2.3.2 Control function of the operation panel

The operation panel has the following switches to implement its control function:
■ BB-ID switch
Identifies the SPARC M10-4S.
■ Mode switch (slide switch)
Specifies the operation or maintenance mode.
■ Power switch
Controls start/stop of the system.

Figure 2-10 Operation panel switches

㩿㪈㪀 㩿㪉㪀 㩿㪊㪀

Location number Component

1 BB-ID switch (SPARC M10-4S only)

2 Mode switch

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 21

 Location number Component

3 Power switch

Use the BB-ID switch to set the BB-ID number of the SPARC M10-4S. Set #0 to #15 for
the SPARC M10-4S. Table 2-5 describes how to operate the BB-ID switch.

Table 2-5 How to operate the BB-ID switch

Operation Description

Pressing the + side. The BB-ID number increases by 1.

Pressing the - side The BB-ID number decreases by 1.

Use the mode switch to set the operation mode for the system. The Locked and
Service operation modes can be switched by sliding the mode switch.
Table 2-6 describes the difference between the modes.

Table 2-6 Functions of the mode switch

Icon Name Description

Locked mode Mode used for normal operation

- The power switch can be used to start the system but not to
stop it.
Service mode Mode used for maintenance
- The power switch cannot be used to start the system but can be
used to stop it.
- Place the system in Service mode to perform maintenance
work with the system stopped.

Use the power switch to start or stop the system. The system starts/stops differently
depending on how the power switch is pressed.
Table 2-7 describes how system starts/stops vary depending on how the power
switch is pressed.

Table 2-7 Functions of the power switch

Icon Operation Description

Brief press If the system has been Operation is ignored.

(For 1 second or started in Service mode
more and less than 4 (*1):
seconds)
If the system is stopped in Operation is ignored.
Service mode:
If the system has been Operation is ignored.
started in Locked mode
(*1):

22 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Table 2-7 Functions of the power switch (continued)
Icon Operation Description

If the system is stopped in Starts the system.

Locked mode: At this time, if a wait time for the air conditioning
facilities or a warm-up time is set on the XSCF,
the processing for waiting for the power-on of the
air conditioning facilities and the completion of
warm-up is omitted.
Long press If the system has been Perform the system shutdown process to stop the
(For 4 seconds or started in Service mode system.
more) (*1):
If the system startup Cancels the system startup process and stops the
process is in progress in system.
Service mode:
If the system stop process Continues the system stop process.
is in progress in Service
mode:
If the system is stopped in Operation is ignored.
Service mode: Even a long press does not start the system.
If the system is stopped in Starts the system.
Locked mode: If a wait time for the air conditioning facilities or
a warm-up time is set on the XSCF, the
processing for waiting for the power-on of the air
conditioning facilities and the completion of
warm-up is omitted.
If the system is not Operation is ignored.
stopped in Locked mode:
*1 If the system has been started, it means that at least one physical partition has been powered on.

Table 2-8 describes the functions of the mode switch.

Table 2-8 Functions of the mode switch

Function Mode switch

Locked Service

Start/stop of the system by the Only system startup is enabled. A long press
power switch powers off the
system.
Inhibition of break signal Enabled. Using the setpparmode Disabled
reception command, you can specify whether to
receive break signals or inhibit their
reception for each physical partition.

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 23

2.4 Checking the LED Indications
This section describes the indications given by LEDs mounted on the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S.
LEDs are mounted on the operation panel on the front of the chassis, on the rear
panel of the chassis, and on each component that can be maintained. If an error
occurs, the LED indication enables you to determine which system requires
maintenance.

2.4.1 Operation panel LEDs

The three LEDs on the operation panel indicate the operation status of the entire
system. In addition, the LEDs enable you to check the system status by their
combination of being on, blinking, or off.
Table 2-9 lists the system operation status indicated by the LEDs, while Table 2-10
lists the system status indicated by the combination of LEDs.

Table 2-9 System operation status indicated by LEDs

Icon Name Color Description

POWER Green Indicates the startup or stop status of the system for
each chassis.
● On: System is started.
● Off: System is stopped.
● Blinking (*1): System stop process is in progress.
XSCF Green Indicates the status of the XSCF for the entire system or
STANDBY for each chassis.
● On: XSCF is functioning normally.
● Off: XSCF is stopped.
● Blinking (*1): System is being initialized after
power-on.
CHECK Amber Indicates the system operation status for each chassis.
● On: Error. An error has been detected.
● Off: Normal, or the power is disconnected or not
being supplied.
● Blinking (*1): Chassis specified at the execution time
of the XSCF command that instructed the blinking.
This is used (as a locator) to identify the location of
the chassis requiring maintenance.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

24 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Table 2-10 System status indicated by combination of LEDs
LED state Description

POWER XSCF CHECK

STANDBY

Off Off Off Power is disconnected.

Off Off On Power has just been turned on.
The XSCF has detected an error.
Off Blinking Off The XSCF is being initialized.
(*1)
Off On Off The XSCF is in the standby state.
The system is waiting for power-on of the air
conditioning facilities (in the data center).
On On Off Warm-up standby processing is in progress. After
the end of this processing, the system starts up.
System startup processing is in progress.
The system is operating.
On On On Although the system is operating normally, an
error has been detected.
Blinking On Off System stop processing is in progress. After the
(*1) end of processing, the fan unit stops.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

2.4.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)

The field engineer or system administrator can identify the chassis requiring
maintenance by using the CHECK LED (A in the figure) on the rear panel. The
CHECK LED on the rear panel is referred to as the system locator, and has the same
function as the CHECK LED on the operation panel.

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 25

 Figure 2-11 Location of the system locator

Table 2-11 Status of the system locator

Icon Name Color Description

CHECK Amber Indicates the system operation status for each chassis.
● On: Error. An error has been detected.
● Off: Normal, or the power is disconnected or not being
supplied.
● Blinking (*1): Chassis specified at the execution time of
the XSCF command that instructed the blinking. This is
used (as a locator) to identify the location of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

2.4.3 LEDs on each component

Each component of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S has a mounted LED. These LEDs light
to indicate that a component requires maintenance if that component experiences a
fault. Start maintenance work after checking the LED status.

26 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

The LEDs on each component and their statuses are as follows:

Table 2-12 XSCF LEDs and their states

Name Color Status Description

READY Green On Indicates that the component is operating.

The component cannot be released and
removed from the system.
Blinking Indicates that the component is currently
(*1) being mounted on the system or being
disconnected from the system.
Off Indicates that the component is disconnected
from the system. Indicates that the
component can be removed and replaced.
CHECK Amber On Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking Indicates that the component requires
(*1) maintenance (this function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off Indicates the normal state.
MASTER Green On Master chassis
(SPARC M10-4S
Off Slave chassis
only)
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

Table 2-13 LEDs on the XSCF-LAN port and their states

Name Color Status Description

ACT Green On Indicates that communication is being

performed.
Off Indicates that communication is not being
performed.
LINK SPEED Amber On Indicates that the communication speed is 1
Gbps.
Green Blinking Indicates that the communication speed is
(*1) 100 Mbps.
Off Indicates that the communication speed is 10
Mbps.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

Table 2-14 LED on the fan unit and its states

Name Color Status Description

CHECK Amber On Indicates that an error has occurred.

Blinking Indicates that the component requires
(*1) maintenance (this function is also referred to
as the "locator").

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 27

 Table 2-14 LED on the fan unit and its states (continued)
Name Color Status Description

Off Indicates the normal state.

*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

Table 2-15 LED on the power supply unit and its states
Name Color Status Description
CHECK Green On Indicates that the input power is turned on
and being supplied normally.
Blinking Indicates that the input power is being
(*1) disconnected.
Amber On Indicates that an error has occurred.
Indicates that the input power to this power
supply unit is turned off in redundant
operation.
Blinking Indicates the warning status (an error has
(*1) occurred but the power supply unit is
operating).
Off Indicates that power is not being supplied.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

Table 2-16 LEDs on the PCIe card slot and their states
Name Color Status Description

POWER Green On Indicates that power is being supplied.

Off Indicates that power is not being supplied.
ATTENTION Amber On Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking Indicates that the component requires
(*1) maintenance (this function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off Indicates the normal state.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

28 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Table 2-17 LEDs on the internal disk and their states
Name Color Status Description

READY Green Blinking Indicates that the disk is being accessed. This
LED is normally on, but it blinks while the
disk is being accessed.
While the LED is blinking, maintenance such
as removal of the disk cannot be performed.
Off Indicates that maintenance such as removal
of the disk can be performed.
CHECK Amber On Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking Indicates that the component requires
(*1) maintenance (this function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off Indicates the normal state.
*1 The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).

2.5 Confirming the Types of Cable

This section describes the types of cables connected to the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
the locations of the ports.
The types and number of the cables to be used vary depending on the configuration.

2.5.1 Types of cable

In a building block configuration, the following cables are used for making a
connection between the SPARC M10-4S systems and between the SPARC M10-4S
and the crossbar box:
■ Crossbar cable
In a building block configuration, this is used to connect the SPARC M10-4S units
to each other or to connect the SPARC M10-4S to a crossbar box.
■ XSCF BB control cable
This is used to connect the XSCFs mounted in the SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box
chassis.
An XSCF mounted in a chassis becomes the master XSCF and monitors or controls
the entire system. XSCFs other than the master XSCF act as slaves and monitor or
control each chassis.
■ XSCF DUAL control cable
This is used to connect the master XSCF to a standby XSCF and duplicate XSCF.
One of the slave XSCFs functions as the standby XSCF. If an abnormality occurs
with the master XSCF, the standby XSCF becomes the master XSCF and continues

Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 29

 the monitoring or control of the system.
Each table has a tag that is used for maintenance recording and management.

2.5.2 Cable connection ports

Figure 2-12 shows the locations of the ports for SPARC M10-4S cable connections. See
the following chapters for the procedures for maintaining the cables:
■ Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables
■ Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
■ Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables

Figure 2-12 Locations of cable connection ports

(2)
(1)

(3)

Location number Connection port

1 XSCF DUAL control port

2 XSCF BB control port
3 Crossbar cable connection port

30 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Chapter 3

Types of Maintenance

This chapter describes the types of maintenance performed on the SPARC M10-4 and
SPARC M10-4S.
■ Types of Maintenance Supported in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
■ Active Maintenance
■ Inactive Maintenance
■ System-stopped Maintenance
Note that the terms used in this manual are defined as follows.

Table 3-1 Definitions of terms

Term Definition

Physical partition requiring Physical partition to which the SPARC M10-4 or SPARC
maintenance M10-4S containing the mounted Field Replaceable Unit
(FRU) requiring maintenance belongs
Chassis requiring maintenance Chassis of the SPARC M10-1 or SPARC M10-4S containing
the mounted Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) requiring
maintenance

3.1 Types of Maintenance Supported in

the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
The types of maintenance supported in the SPARC M10-4 and SPARC M10-4S
depend on the system operation status during maintenance. The supported
maintenance is divided into three types: active maintenance, inactive maintenance,
and system-stopped maintenance.
■ Active Maintenance
Maintenance is performed when the physical partition of an FRU requiring
maintenance is operating.

31
 ■ Inactive maintenance
Maintenance is performed when the physical partition of an FRU requiring
maintenance is stopped.
■ System-stopped maintenance
Maintenance is performed with all physical partitions stopped.
Each of the three maintenance types is further divided into two types: hot maintenance
and cold maintenance.
■ Hot maintenance
Maintenance is performed with the power cord of the FRU requiring maintenance
connected.
■ Cold maintenance
Maintenance is performed with the power cord of the FRU requiring maintenance
removed.
The FRUs for which hot maintenance or cold maintenance is enabled differ between a
configuration using one SPARC M10-4 or SPARC M10-4S unit and a building block
configuration using two or more SPARC M10-4S units.
For example, active/cold maintenance can be performed on a CPU memory unit only
if it is in a building block configuration. In this state, the physical partition to which
the target CPU memory unit belongs is operating (active). This means that
maintenance is performed after this CPU memory unit (PSB) is dynamically released
from the physical partition and the power cord of the CPU memory unit is removed.

3.2 Active Maintenance

The type of maintenance performed with Oracle Solaris operating on the physical
partition is referred to as active maintenance. Note that active/cold maintenance is
not supported in a system that uses one SPARC M10-4 or SPARC M10-4S unit.
Table 3-2 shows whether active maintenance is enabled for each FRU.

Table 3-2 Whether active maintenance (replacement/addition/removal) is enabled for each FRU
-: Maintenance cannot be performed.
FRU Single-chassis configuration Building block configuration

Active/hot maintenance Active/hot maintenance Active/cold maintenance

(*6)

CPU memory unit - - OK

Memory - - OK
Crossbar unit (*1) - - -
Power supply unit OK (*3) OK (*3) OK
Fan unit OK (*3) OK (*3) OK
Internal disk OK (*4) OK (*4) OK
PCIe card OK (*5) OK (*5) OK

32 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Table 3-2 Whether active maintenance (replacement/addition/removal) is enabled for each FRU (continued)
-: Maintenance cannot be performed.
FRU Single-chassis configuration Building block configuration

Active/hot maintenance Active/hot maintenance Active/cold maintenance

(*6)

PSU backplane unit - - OK

Operation panel - - OK
Crossbar cable (*2) - - -
XSCF BB control cable (*2) - - OK
XSCF DUAL control cable (*2) - - OK
*1 The unit is mounted only in the SPARC M10-4S.
*2 The cable is mounted only in a building block configuration using the SPARC M10-4S.
*3 This is enabled only if the target FRU is in a redundant configuration. For the redundant configuration, we recommend active/hot
maintenance that has a short work time.
*4 If the target internal disk is the boot device, you cannot use this form of maintenance when the configuration is not a redundant
configuration (RAID configuration). If it is not the boot device, or if even the boot device is redundantly configured, we recommend
active/hot maintenance that has a short work time.
*5 Maintenance work is performed using PCI hot plug (PHP). Combined with dynamic SR-IOV or the dynamic reconfiguration function
for PCIe end point devices, it also enables active maintenance of a PCIe card assigned as the SR-IOV virtual function or PCIe end point, to
an I/O domain.
*6 All FRUs are subject to this maintenance. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect the chassis requiring
maintenance from the physical partition.

3.3 Inactive Maintenance

The type of maintenance performed with the physical partition stopped--the one to
which the chassis requiring maintenance belongs--is referred to as inactive
maintenance. You can perform inactive maintenance only for a system that uses the
SPARC M10-4S in a building block configuration.
Table 3-3 shows whether inactive maintenance is enabled for each FRU.

Table 3-3 Whether inactive maintenance (replacement/addition/removal) is enabled for each FRU
-: Maintenance cannot be performed.
FRU Building block configuration

Inactive/hot maintenance Inactive/cold maintenance

CPU memory unit - OK

Memory - OK
Crossbar unit - OK
Power supply unit OK OK
Fan unit OK OK
Internal disk OK OK

Chapter 3 Types of Maintenance 33

Table 3-3 Whether inactive maintenance (replacement/addition/removal) is enabled for each FRU (continued)
-: Maintenance cannot be performed.
FRU Building block configuration

Inactive/hot maintenance Inactive/cold maintenance

PCIe card OK OK
PSU backplane unit - OK
Operation panel - OK
Crossbar cable - OK
XSCF BB control cable - OK
XSCF DUAL control cable - OK

3.4 System-stopped Maintenance

The type of maintenance performed with all physical partitions on the system
stopped is referred to as system-stopped maintenance.
Table 3-4 shows whether system-stopped maintenance is enabled for each FRU.

Table 3-4 Whether system-stopped maintenance (replacement/addition/removal) is enabled for each FRU
-: Maintenance cannot be performed.
FRU Single-chassis configuration Building block configuration

System-stopped/hot System-stopped/ System-stopped/hot System-stopped/

maintenance cold maintenance maintenance cold maintenance

CPU memory unit - OK - OK

Memory - OK - OK
Crossbar unit (*1) - OK - OK
Power supply unit OK OK OK OK
Fan unit OK OK OK OK
Internal disk OK OK OK OK
PCIe card OK OK OK OK
PSU backplane unit - OK - OK
Operation panel - OK - OK
Crossbar cable (*2) - - - OK
XSCF BB control cable (*2) - - - OK
XSCF DUAL control cable (*2) - - - OK
*1 The unit is mounted only in the SPARC M10-4S.
*2 The cable is mounted only in a building block configuration using the SPARC M10-4S.

34 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Chapter 4

Preparation and Precautions for

Maintenance

This chapter describes preparations that must be completed prior to maintenance and
the precautions for various work and maintenance.
■ Confirming the System Configuration
■ Troubleshooting
■ Maintenance Precautions

4.1 Confirming the System Configuration

This section describes how to check the hardware and software configurations.
The system configuration must be the same before and after maintenance work. If an
error occurs in the system, record the system configuration and the FRU state before
starting maintenance. After maintenance, confirm that the system configuration is the
same as that before maintenance.

4.1.1 Confirming the hardware configuration

Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the configuration and status of the
FRU mounted in the chassis. Before performing any maintenance work, check and
record the hardware configuration of the chassis.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the hardware configuration
information.

XSCF> showhardconf

The following information appears:

■ Current configuration and status
■ Number of mounted FRUs

35
 ■ Status of the unit in which a physical partition error or degradation occurred
■ Information on the PCI expansion unit
■ Name properties of the PCI Express (PCIe) card

4.1.2 Confirming the software and firmware

configurations
The software and firmware configurations and versions affect system operation. To
change the configuration or investigate a problem, check the latest state and check for
any problems in the software.

Confirming the software configuration

Use Oracle Solaris commands to check the software configuration.
If you are logged in to the XSCF console, switch to the control domain console by
executing the console command beforehand.
Table 4-1 lists the commands used for checking the software configuration.

Table 4-1 Commands for checking the software configuration

Command Description

pkg(1) (Oracle Solaris 11) Displays Oracle Solaris correction information

showrev(1M) (Oracle Solaris 10) and the version.
ldm(1M) Displays logical domain configuration information.

1. Log in to the control domain console of the physical partition where the FRU
requiring maintenance is mounted.
For details on logging in to the control domain console, see "8.3 Switching to
the Control Domain Console from the XSCF Shell" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC
M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
2. Execute the pkg(1) command to display Oracle Solaris correction information
and version.
- For Oracle Solaris 11, execute the pkg(1) command.

# pkg info entire

Name: entire
Summary: entire incorporation including Support Repository Update
(Oracle Solaris 11.1.12.5.0).
* SRU version

- For Oracle Solaris 10, execute the showrev(1M) command.

# showrev -p

To check the Oracle VM Server for SPARC version, execute the ldm(1M) command.

36 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 # ldm -V
Logical Domains Manager (v 3.1)
* Version of Oracle VM Server for SPARC
Hypervisor control protocol v 1.9
Using Hypervisor MD v 1.3

Confirming the firmware configuration

Confirm the firmware configuration with the version command, which is an XSCF
shell command.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the version command to confirm the firmware version information.
In the following example, "-c xcp" is entered to confirm the overall XCP version.

XSCF> version -c xcp

4.1.3 Confirming the FRU information and resource

information
Use XSCF shell commands to check the FRU information and resource information.
Table 4-2 lists the commands used for checking the FRU information and resource
information. For details on each command, see the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems
XSCF Reference Manual of the XCP firmware version used.

Table 4-2 Commands for checking FRU information and resource information
Command Description

showstatus Displays the FRU status. Out of the FRUs in the system
configuration, this command displays information on a faulty or
degraded unit or FRU.
showboards Displays information on a physical system board (PSB). Displays
information on a physical system board that belongs to the
specified physical partition and information on all the physical
system boards that are mounted.
showpcl Displays the configuration information for a physical partition
(hardware resource information).
showfru Displays the setting information for a device.

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 37

4.2 Troubleshooting
This section describes the troubleshooting procedure.
In the following cases, which are suspected failure conditions, use the troubleshooting
flow to identify the failure location. For details on the troubleshooting flow, see "4.2.1
Determining the causes of failures."
■ When the CHECK LED is on
■ When an error message is displayed on the console
■ When an error is displayed as a result of executing a command for checking the
status
■ When an error is displayed in the error log

4.2.1 Determining the causes of failures

This section describes the flow for determining the causes of failures. Also apply this
flow to identify failures in the PCI expansion unit.

38 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Figure 4-1 Troubleshooting flow

Start

Are the power OK YES

and AC OK LEDs off?

NO

Was e-mail sent by YES YES Is the power cord

the XSCF mail function? connected correctly?

NO NO
Confirm that an error message is
displayed on the OS and XSCF
consoles.

Execute showlogs on XSCF to Connect the power

display failure information. cord correctly.

Check /var/adm/messages on
Oracle Solaris.

Write down the displayed failure

information.

Contact our service engineer.

End

4.2.2 Identifying a failure

This section describes how to identify a failure. Use the troubleshooting flow
described in "4.2.1 Determining the causes of failures" to determine an appropriate
way to check the failure.

Checking the LED indications

Check the LEDs on the operation panel, rear panel, and each component to identify
the FRU requiring maintenance. Check the status of an FRU from its LED before
starting maintenance work on the FRU.
■ Operation panel LEDs

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 39

 You can determine the status of the system by checking the LEDs on the operation
panel. For details, see "2.4.1 Operation panel LEDs."
■ Rear panel LED
You can determine the status of the system by checking the CHECK LED on the
rear panel of the chassis, which duplicates the CHECK LED on the operation
panel. For details, see "2.4.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)."
■ LED of each FRU
If an error occurs in the hardware in the chassis, you can determine the location of
the error by checking the LED of the FRU that incorporates the failed hardware.
For details, see "2.4.3 LEDs on each component."
Note that some FRUs, such as memory, do not have mounted LEDs. To check the
status of a FRU that does not have an LED, execute XSCF shell commands such as
the showhardconf command from the maintenance terminal. For details, see
"Checking the FRU status" below.

Checking error messages

Display error messages to check log information and an error overview.
You can use either of the following two methods to check the error messages:
■ Checking error log information with the XSCF shell
For details, see "12.1 Checking a Log Saved by the XSCF" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
■ Checking messages with Oracle Solaris
For details, see "12.2 Checking Warning and Notification Messages" in the
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

Checking the FRU status

Execute XSCF firmware commands to determine the system hardware configuration
and the status of each FRU.
- showhardconf command
Execute the showhardconf command to check the information on the FRU list.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the showhardconf command to check the FRU list.
A faulty FRU is indicated by an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the line.

XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081229003; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Running;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2050h; Serial:2081229003;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;

40 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 + Memory_Size:320 GB;
------------------------Omitted------------------------
PCI#0 Status:Normal; Name_Property:pci;
+ Vendor-ID:108e; Device-ID:9020;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:0000; Subsystem-ID:0000;
+ Model:;
+ Connection:7001;
* PCIBOX#7001; Status:Faulted; Ver:1110h; Serial:2121237001;
+ FRU-Part-Number:;
IOB Status:Normal; Serial:PP123403JE ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B66X 008AG ;
LINKBOARD Status:Normal; Serial:PP1234026P ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B60X 001AA ;
PCI#1 Name_Property:ethernet;
+ Vendor-ID:1077; Device-ID:8000;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:1077; Subsystem-ID:017e;
+ Model:;
------------------------Omitted-----------------------

- showstatus command
Execute the showstatus command to check the FRU status.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the showstatus command to check the status.
A faulty FRU is indicated by an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the line.

XSCF> showstatus
MBU Status:Normal;
* MEM#0A Status:Faulted;

The FRU status is displayed after the "Status:" string.

Table 4-3 describes the FRU status.

Table 4-3 FRU status

Display Description

Normal The unit is in the normal state.

Faulted The unit is faulty and is not operating.
Degraded A part of the unit has failed or degraded, but the unit is running.
Deconfigured Due to the failure or degradation of another unit, the target unit and
components of its underlying layer has been degraded, though there
is no problem in them.
Maintenance Maintenance is being performed. The replacefru, addfru, or initbb
command is being executed.

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 41

 Checking the status of a PCI expansion unit
If a PCI expansion unit is connected, execute the ioxadm command from the XSCF
shell to check the status of the PCI expansion unit.
- ioxadm command
Execute the ioxadm command to check the environmental conditions (temperature,
voltage, etc.) or LED indications for the PCI expansion unit.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the ioxadm command to check the environmental conditions of the
specified PCI expansion unit.
To specify a PCI expansion unit, enter the serial number of the PCI expansion
unit after determining it by executing the ioxadm list command.
The following example shows the environmental conditions for the
PCIBOX#2008 "2008" are the last four digits of the serial number of the PCI
expansion unit.

XSCF> ioxadm env -te PCIBOX#2008

Location Sensor Value Resolution Units
PCIBOX#2008 AIRFLOW 180.000 0.000 CHM
PCIBOX#2008 P_CONSUMPTION 68.000 0.000 W
PCIBOX#2008/PSU#0 FAN 3936.000 0.000 RPM
PCIBOX#2008/PSU#1 FAN 3584.000 0.000 RPM
PCIBOX#2008/FAN#0 FAN 3374.000 0.000 RPM
PCIBOX#2008/FAN#1 FAN 3374.000 0.000 RPM
PCIBOX#2008/FAN#2 FAN 3374.000 0.000 RPM
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_INTAKE 26.000 0.000 C
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_PART_NO0 31.500 0.000 C
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_PART_NO1 30.750 0.000 C
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_PART_NO2 31.500 0.000 C
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_12_0V 12.069 0.000 V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO0 3.293 0.000 V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO1 3.295 0.000 V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO2 3.291 0.000 V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO3 3.300 0.000 V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_1_8V 1.804 0.000 V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_0_9V 0.900 0.000 V

Checking log information

Execute the showlogs command to check error log information.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the showlogs command to check the log information.
The log information is listed in the order of date, with the oldest appearing first.
The following example shows that an Alarm occurred in PSU#1 at 12:45:31 on
Oct 20, and the status changed to Warning at 15:45:31 on the same day.

42 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

XSCF> showlogs error
Date: Oct 20 12:45:31 JST 2012
Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344
Status: Alarm Occurred: Oct 20 12:45:31.000 JST 2012
FRU: /PSU#1
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Date: Oct 20 15:45:31 JST 2012
Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344
Status: Warning Occurred: Oct 20 15:45:31.000 JST 2012
FRU: /PSU#1
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)

Table 4-4 shows what log information each operand of the showlogs command can
display.

Table 4-4 Operands of the showlogs command and the log to be displayed
Operand Description

error Lists the error log.

event Lists the event log.
power Lists the power log.
env Lists the temperature history.
monitor Lists the monitoring message log.
console Lists the console message log.
ipl Lists the IPL message log.
panic Lists the panic message log.

Checking the messages output by the predictive self-repairing

tool
Check the messages output from the Oracle Solaris Fault Manager predictive
self-repairing tool, running on Oracle Solaris. Oracle Solaris Fault Manager supports
the following functions:
■ Receives telemetry information about errors.
■ Performs troubleshooting.
■ Disables the FRUs that have experienced errors.
■ Turns on the LED of an FRU that has experienced an error and displays the details
in a system console message.
Table 4-5 lists typical messages that are generated if an error occurs. These messages
indicate that the fault has already been diagnosed. If corrective actions can be taken
by the system, this indicates that they have already been taken. In addition, if the
system is running, corrective actions continue to be applied.
Messages are displayed on the console and are recorded in the /var/adm/messages
file.

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 43

 Table 4-5 Predictive self-repairing messages
Output Displayed Description

Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 EVENT-TIME：Tue EVENT-TIME: Time stamp of the

Nov 1 16：30：20 PST 2005 diagnosis
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 PLATFORM： PLATFORM: Description of the
ORCL,SPARC64-X, CSN：-,HOSTNAME：dt88-292 chassis in which the error occurred
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 SOURCE：eft, REV：1.13 SOURCE: Information on the
diagnosis engine used to identify
the error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 EVENT-ID： EVENT-ID: Universally unique
afc7e660-d609-4b2f-86b8-ae7c6b8d50c4 event ID for this error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 DESC： DESC: Basic description of the error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 A problem was detected in
the PCI Express subsystem
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 Refer to http：//support. Website: Where to find specific
oracle.com/msg/SUN4-8000-0Y for more information. information and countermeasures
for this error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 AUTO-RESPONSE： AUTO-RESPONSE: What the
One or more device instances may be disabled. system has done (if anything) to
alleviate any subsequent problems
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 IMPACT：Loss of services IMPACT: Description of the
provided by the device instances associated with this assumed impact of the failure
fault.
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 REC-ACTION： REC-ACTION: Brief description of
Schedule a repair procedure to replace the affected the corrective action the system
device.Use Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 fmdump -v –u administrator should apply
EVENT_ID to identify the device or contact Sun for
support.

Identifying the location of the chassis requiring maintenance

Execute the setlocator command to identify the location of the chassis requiring
maintenance by causing the CHECK LED on the operation panel and the CHECK
LED (locator) on the rear panel to blink.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the setlocator command to identify the location of the chassis
requiring maintenance by causing the CHECK LED of the chassis to blink.
The CHECK LEDs on the operation and rear panels blink.
The chassis requiring maintenance in the following execution example is the
master chassis.

XSCF> setlocator blink

If the chassis requiring maintenance is not the master chassis, set "setlocator -b

44 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 bb_id blink".
For details on where to find and how to check the CHECK LEDs, see "2.4
Checking the LED Indications."

4.2.3 Downloading error log information

This section describes the operations for downloading error log information.
To download error log information, use the XSCF log fetch function. The XSCF unit
has a maintenance USB port so that maintenance information such as error logs can
be obtained easily. (The port is marked as MAINTENANCE on the rear panel.) For
details, see "12.1.15 Saving a log to a file with the snapshot command" and "12.1.16
Saving a log to a local USB device" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System
Operation and Administration Guide.
In the following example, detailed information on the error logs of all chassis in the
system in a building block configuration is downloaded to the USB memory
connected to the USB port.

XSCF> snapshot –d usb0 –L F –r –a –v

Testing writability of USB device....SUCCESS
About to remove all files from device 'usb0'. Continue? [Y|N] : y
BB#00: start to execute snapshot
BB#01: start to execute snapshot
.
.
Collecting data into /media/usb_msd/<hostname>_<ipaddress>_<date>.zip
Data collection complete.

4.3 Maintenance Precautions

This section describes the precautions for maintenance.

4.3.1 Precautions for replacement

This section describes the precautions for replacement.

Precautions for CPU memory unit and memory replacement

■ Do not replace the CPU memory unit lower at the same time as the PSU backplane
unit. Since the CPU memory unit lower and PSU backplane unit have saved
device identification information, the system will fail to operate normally if both
units are replaced at the same time. Replace either of the CPU memory unit lower
and PSU backplane unit, and confirm that the replacement part operates normally

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 45

 by executing the showhardconf or showstatus command. Then, replace the other
FRU.
■ The XSCF mounted in the CPU memory unit lower is not a FRU (field replaceable
unit). When replacing the CPU memory unit lower, do not switch the XSCF units.
■ When remounting memory during the replacement of the CPU memory unit or
memory, be sure to remount the memory in it's original location before the
replacement.
■ The weight of the CPU memory unit is 17 kg (37.4 lb). If the mounting location in
the rack is 24U or higher, be sure that two people perform the work. If you
attempt to perform the maintenance work alone, you may injure yourself or cause
damage to the chassis.
■ To use the hardware RAID function, after replacing the CPU memory unit lower,
you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume. For details, see "14.2.11
Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems
System Operation and Administration Guide.
■ Before replacing the CPU memory unit lower, execute the dumpconfig command
to save the system setting information. If you replace the CPU memory unit lower,
the CPU Activation setting information and CPU Activation key may be erased.
To return the CPU Activation setting information and CPU Activation key to their
original states, execute the restoreconfig command to restore the CPU Activation
setting information and CPU Activation key saved beforehand using the
dumpconfig command. For details, see "10.10 Saving/Restoring XSCF Setting
Information" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and
Administration Guide.
■ If you switch the microSD card when replacing the CPU memory unit lower, the
maintenance time is shorter since the XSCF setting information is inherited. A
check of the XCP firmware version after diagnosis of the system board may find
that the CMU firmware versions do not match between the current XCP and
reserve XCP. However, this does not affect system operation. If you start the
system when the current and reserve XCPs have been switched, the CMU
firmware stored on the microSD card is automatically applied.

Precautions for power supply unit and fan unit replacement

■ The power supply units and cooling fans have redundant configurations. The
system can operate even if one power supply unit or one cooling fan in a fan unit
experiences a failure. However, avoid operating the system with a faulty power
supply unit or a faulty cooling fan in one of the fan units for an extended period.
Replace the unit containing the faulty power supply or faulty fan.
■ When replacing multiple power supply units or fan units, replace one unit at a
time. If redundancy of the power supply units or fan units cannot be secured,
perform maintenance with the system stopped.
■ Do not force the power supply unit or fan unit into its slot. Using excessive force
may damage the FRU and chassis.
■ The type of power supply unit or fan unit varies depending on the number of
CPU clocks.

46 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Precautions for PCIe card replacement
■ For active maintenance using PHP, a multipath setting is necessary depending on
the use of the PCIe cards.
■ For active maintenance using PHP, confirm that the card supports PHP as
described in "Appendix A Cards that Support PCI Hot Plug and Dynamic
Reconfiguration" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation
Guide. For active replacement combined with dynamic SR-IOV and the dynamic
reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point, confirm the supported card as
described in "Appendix B Cards that Support SR-IOV" and "Appendix D Cards
that Support the Dynamic Reassignment Function for the PCIe End Point Device
(PCIe Card)" in the same manual.

Precautions for operation panel replacement

■ To replace the operation panel, remove the PSU backplane from the chassis.
■ To replace the operation panel, set the BB-ID of the replacement operation panel to
the same value as that before replacement.

4.3.2 Precautions for installation

Precautions for expansion of the CPU memory unit upper

■ When installing a CPU memory unit upper, remove the filler unit. Store the
removed filler unit in a safe place because it will be needed if you subsequently
remove the CPU memory unit upper.
■ If PCI Express cables are not connected to the CPU memory unit lower, you need
to add PCI Express cables.
■ If PCI Express cables are connected to the CPU memory unit lower, you need to
add only one PCI Express cable.
■ If the CPU memory unit upper for the 2CPU configuration of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S is installed, the root complex is also installed. Then, due to the I/O
bus reconfiguration function(*1), the I/O bandwidth increases, and the PCIe card
installation rules(*2) change. In addition, the I/O bus reconfiguration also changes
the device path of the I/O device(*3), so you may have to reconfigure the logical
domains.
■ The type of CPU memory unit varies depending on the number of CPU clocks.
They cannot be mixed in the same device, but they can be mixed in a system with
a building block configuration.

For details, see "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper."
For details, see the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide.
For details, see "A.2 SPARC M10-4 Device Paths" or "A.3 SPARC M10-4S Device Paths" in
the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 47

 Precautions for memory expansion
■ Observe the memory installation rules when you expand memory. For details, see
"2.2.1 Memory installation rules."
■ When you expand memory by 64 GB, apply XCP 2090 or later.
■ Unless memory modules of 512 GB (64 GB DIMM x 8) are mounted in the 16
DIMM slots under a CPU, memory modules of up to two different capacities can
be mounted together. In this case, use the same type within each memory group.

Note - When you expand memory with a different capacity, apply XCP 2052 or later.

Precautions for internal disk expansion

■ To expand an internal disk, remove the hard disk drive filler unit from the slot in
which you will install the internal disk. Store the removed filler unit in a safe place
because it will be needed if you subsequently remove the internal disk.

Precautions for PCIe card expansion

■ Set a multipath depending on the use of the PCIe card when performing active/hot
maintenance or active/cold maintenance with PHP.
■ For active addition using PHP, confirm that the card supports PHP as described in
"Appendix A Cards that Support PCI Hot Plug and Dynamic Reconfiguration"
in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide. For active
addition combined with dynamic SR-IOV and the dynamic reconfiguration
function for the PCIe end point, confirm the supported card as described in
"Appendix B Cards that Support SR-IOV" and "Appendix D Cards that
Support the Dynamic Reassignment Function for the PCIe End Point Device (PCIe
Card)" in the same manual.
■ When performing PCIe card expansion, remove the PCIe card filler from the PCIe
card cassette. Store the removed filler in a safe place because it will be needed if
you subsequently remove the PCIe card.

4.3.3 Precautions for reduction

Precautions for CPU memory unit upper or memory reduction

■ When removing a CPU memory unit upper, mount the stored filler unit after
removing the CPU memory unit upper.
■ Remove the shortest PCIe cable that connects the CPU memory unit upper and
CPU memory unit lower. However, you do not need to remove the three PCIe
cables that are connected to the CPU memory unit lower.
■ Removal of the CPU memory unit upper in a system where the I/O bus was
reconfigured eliminates the root complex used in the CPU memory unit upper.

48 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Also, some PCIe slots can no longer be used. To enable use of the PCIe slots,
"activate" the I/O bus reconfiguration function (*1). However, the I/O device path
changes as a result, so you may need to reconfigure the logical domains.
■ Observe the memory installation rules when you remove memory. For details, see
"2.2.1 Memory installation rules."

For details, see "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper."

Precautions for internal disk reduction

■ When removing an internal disk, remove the internal disk and then mount the
filler unit that has been stored in a safe place onto the empty slot.

Precautions for PCIe card reduction

■ Release the multipath depending on the use of a PCIe card when performing
active/hot maintenance or active/cold maintenance with PHP.
■ For active removal using PHP, confirm that the card supports PHP as described in
"Appendix A Cards that Support PCI Hot Plug and Dynamic Reconfiguration"
in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide. For active
removal combined with dynamic SR-IOV and the dynamic reconfiguration
function for the PCIe end point, confirm the supported card as described in
"Appendix B Cards that Support SR-IOV" and "Appendix D Cards that
Support the Dynamic Reassignment Function for the PCIe End Point Device (PCIe
Card)" in the same manual.
■ When performing PCIe card removal, remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card
cassette and then attach the filler that has been stored in a safe place.

Chapter 4 Preparation and Precautions for Maintenance 49

50 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 5

Preparations Required for

Maintenance

This chapter describes the preparations before you can physically remove an FRU.
See this chapter, as required, when performing maintenance on each FRU described
in Chapter 8 onward.
■ Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance
■ Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode
■ Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status
■ Preparations for Enabling Active Maintenance
■ Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance
■ Stopping the Entire System
■ Saving XSCF Setting Information
■ Releasing a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S FRU from the System with the replacefru
Command
■ Accessing an FRU

Caution - Do not operate the target FRU while OpenBoot PROM is running (the ok
prompt is displayed). After powering off the physical partition or starting Oracle
Solaris, operate the target FRU.

5.1 Preparing Tools Required for

Maintenance
Table 5-1 lists the tools required for FRU maintenance.

Table 5-1 Maintenance tools

Item Use

Phillips screwdriver (No.2) For removing or installing screws

51
 Table 5-1 Maintenance tools (continued)
Item Use

Flathead screwdriver (small) Used when installing the CPU memory unit upper
Wrist strap For static grounding
ESD mat For static grounding

5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service

Mode
Note - The mode switch on the operation panel does not need to be changed in active
maintenance.

1. Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Service mode.

For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master
chassis and those chassis (BB-ID#00, #01) whose XSCFs are in the standby state
to Service mode.
For details, see "2.3.2 Control function of the operation panel."

Remarks - For a building block configuration with a connected crossbar box, switch the
mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 of the crossbar box.

5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and

Resource Usage Status
This section describes the checking of the operating condition of the logical domain
and the resource usage status before maintenance is performed on each FRU.

5.3.1 Checking the operating condition of the physical

partition or logical domain
In the following execution example, the operating condition of the physical partition
and logical domain is checked from firmware.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.

52 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 2. Execute the showpparstatus command to check the operating condition of
the physical partition.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Running",
which indicates that the physical partition is operating.

XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0
PPAR-ID PPAR Status
00 Running

3. Execute the showdomainstatus command to check the operating condition of

the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] of the logical domains of PPAR-ID 00 displays
"Solaris running," which indicates that Oracle Solaris is operating.

XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name Status
primary Solaris running
guest0 Solaris running
guest1 Solaris running
iodom0 Solaris running
iodom1 Solaris running
sdiodomain Solaris running
sr-iodomain Solaris running

5.3.2 Checking the assignment status of I/O devices

In the following execution example, the operating condition of the logical domain,
the resource usage status, and the assignment status of I/O devices are checked from
Oracle Solaris on the logical domain. For details, see "3.2 Operations and
Commands Related to Logical Domain Configurations" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC
M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide.
1. Log in to Oracle Solaris on the logical domain.
2. Execute the following ldm command to check the operating condition of the
logical domain.

# ldm list-domain

3. Execute the following ldm command to check the resource usage status.

# ldm list-devices -a

4. Execute the following ldm command to check the assignment status of I/O
devices.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 53

 # ldm list-io

For maintenance on a PCIe card, retain the output data of the ldm list-io
command, since you will need it later when restoring the original configuration
("6.5.3 Restoring a logical domain to the pre-maintenance state") after
maintenance.

5.3.3 Checking the usage status of the internal disk

In the following execution example, the configurations and states of devices in pools
and errors generated from the devices are checked.
1. Log in to Oracle Solaris on the logical domain.
2. Execute the zpool status command to check the configurations and operating
conditions of devices.
The following example shows that the system volume of the control domain has
a mirror configuration.

# zpool status rpool

pool: rpool
state: ONLINE
scan: resilvered 28.7M in 0h0m with 0 errors on Tue Jan 21 10:10:01 2014
config:
NAME STATE READ WRITE CKSUM
rpool ONLINE 0 0 0
mirror-0 ONLINE 0 0 0
c2t50000393E802CCE2d0s0 ONLINE 0 0 0
c3t50000393A803B13Ed0s0 ONLINE 0 0 0
errors: No known data errors

5.4 Preparations for Enabling Active

Maintenance
This section describes the flow of work to be performed in Oracle Solaris on the
control domain in active maintenance. For details on the work and the commands
used, see "3.2 Operations and Commands Related to Logical Domain Configurations"
in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide and the manual
for the application being used.

54 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices
This section describes the work to be done before maintenance using PCI hot plug
(PHP) or dynamic reconfiguration (DR) of the physical partition.
■ When using PCI hot plug (PHP)

If the PCIe end point of the PCIe card requiring maintenance is assigned to an I/O
domain or if the SR-IOV virtual function is assigned, return the PCIe end point to
the root or control domain.
(1) Stopping the use of an I/O device
(2) Deleting the assignment of an I/O device
■ When using dynamic reconfiguration (DR) for the physical partition
If the PCIe end point of the PCIe card in the chassis requiring maintenance is
assigned to an I/O domain or if the SR-IOV virtual function is assigned, return the
PCIe end point to the root or control domain. Then, remove the root complex from
the root or control domain.
(1) Stopping the use of an I/O device
(2) Deleting the assignment of an I/O device
(3) Deleting the root complex

(1) Stopping the use of an I/O device

If there is any logical domain that is physically or virtually using the PCIe card
mounted in the chassis requiring maintenance, stop the use of the I/O device to keep
it unused.
With a redundant configuration, use the duplication function to release the target I/O
device so that it will not be used. For details on the work, see the manual for the
application being used.
With a non-redundant configuration, place the I/O device in the unused state, such as
by deactivating the network or unmounting the disk to stop the use. For details on
the work, see the Oracle Solaris documents and the manual for the application being
used.

(2) Deleting the assignment of an I/O device

When using virtual I/O

When using a virtual I/O service, delete the virtual I/O device. For details, see the
Oracle VM Server for SPARC Administration Guide from Oracle.
When using PCIe end point assignment
If the PCIe end point device of the chassis requiring maintenance is assigned to an
I/O domain, delete the PCIe end point device from the I/O domain and return it to
the root domain (includes the control domain). The work procedure varies

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 55

 depending on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device is used. For details, see Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Procedure that depends on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for
the PCIe end point device is used
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Dynamic
reconfiguration reconfiguration
function function not
used (*1) used (*2)

1 Enable the hotplug service. svcadm enable hotplug Yes Yes (*3)
2 Stop the I/O domain. ldm stop-domain - Yes
3 Delete the PCIe end point ldm remove-io Yes Yes
device from the I/O domain.
4 Set the root domain to delayed ldm start-reconf - Yes
reconfiguration.
5 Assign the PCIe end point ldm add-io Yes Yes
device to the root domain.
6 Restart the root domain. shutdown -i6 -g0 -y - Yes
7 Disable the hotplug service. svcadm disable hotplug Yes Yes (*3)
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device is supported by XCP 2230 or later and Oracle VM Server
for SPARC 3.1.1.1 or later.
*2 If dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point devices is not used, stop the I/O domain, delete the physical
I/O device, and then return the physical I/O device to the root domain.
*3 If dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device is not used, the hotplug service operates regardless of
its enable/disable setting.

Note - Note the following when deleting the physical I/O device (PCIe end point device) of
the boot disk.
If the boot disk of the I/O domain is in a redundant configuration, you need to stop the I/O
domain on Oracle VM Server for SPARC 3.1.1 or earlier. However, you do not need to stop it
on Oracle VM Server for SPARC 3.1.1.1 or later.

1. If the hotplug service is disabled for the I/O and root domains, execute the
svcadm enable command to enable the hotplug service.

# svcadm enable hotplug

2. Stop the I/O domain.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 3.

# ldm stop-domain <I/O domain name>

3. Delete the physical I/O device from the I/O domain.

56 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 # ldm remove-io <device name> <I/O domain name>

4. Transition the root domain to delayed reconfiguration mode.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 5.

# ldm start-reconf <root domain name>

5. Reassign the physical I/O device deleted in step 3 to the root domain.

# ldm add-io <device name> <root domain name>

6. Log in to the root domain, and restart Oracle Solaris.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 7.

# telnet localhost <port number>

...
# shutdown -i6 -g0 -y

7. If you need to disable the hotplug service for the I/O and root domains,
disable the hotplug service.

# svcadm disable hotplug

When using the SR-IOV virtual function

Suppose that a virtual function (VF) using the SR-IOV function on the PCIe card
mounted in the PCI expansion unit requiring maintenance was created and assigned
to a domain. In this case, delete and discard the virtual function from the control
domain by using the ldm command. The work procedure differs between the
dynamic SR-IOV function and the static SR-IOV function. For details, see Table 5-3.
For details on the procedure, see the Oracle VM Server for SPARC Administration Guide
from Oracle.

Table 5-3 Release procedure that depends on the function: dynamic SR-IOV function or
static SR-IOV function
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Static SR-IOV
SR-IOV function used
function used
(*1)

1 Enable the hotplug service. svcadm enable hotplug Yes Yes (*2)
2 Stop the I/O domain. ldm stop-domain - Yes

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 57

 Table 5-3 Release procedure that depends on the function: dynamic SR-IOV function or
static SR-IOV function (continued)
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Static SR-IOV
SR-IOV function used
function used
(*1)

3 Delete the virtual function (VF) ldm remove-io Yes Yes

from the I/O domain.
4 Set the root domain of the ldm start-reconf - Yes
physical function (PF) to
delayed reconfiguration.
5 Discard the virtual function (VF). ldm destroy-vf Yes Yes
6 Restart the root domain. shutdown -i6 -g0 -y - Yes
7 Disable the hotplug service. svcadm disable hotplug Yes Yes (*2)
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration for the SR-IOV virtual function is supported by XCP 2210 or later and Oracle VM
Server for SPARC 3.1 or later.
*2 If static reconfiguration for the SR-IOV virtual function is used, the hotplug service operates regardless of its
enable/disable setting.

1. If the hotplug service is disabled for the I/O and root domains, execute the
svcadm enable command to enable the hotplug service.

# svcadm enable hotplug

2. Stop the I/O domain.

If the dynamic SR-IOV function is used, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 3.

# ldm stop-domain <I/O domain name>

3. The virtual function (VF) has been assigned to an I/O domain. Delete it from
the I/O domain.
Execute the ldm remove-io command to delete the virtual function (VF) assigned
to the I/O domain from the I/O domain. If multiple VFs are assigned from the
physical function (PF) of a single PCIe card, delete all the VFs corresponding to
that PF from the I/O domain.

# ldm remove-io <VF name> <I/O domain name>

4. Transition the root domain that has the assigned physical function (PF) to
delayed reconfiguration mode.
If the dynamic SR-IOV function is used, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 5.

# ldm start-reconf <root domain name>

58 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

5. Discard the virtual function (VF).
Execute the ldm destroy-vf command to discard the virtual function (VF).
However, the VF needs to be discarded in the reverse order to that in which it
was created.

# ldm destroy-vf <VF name>

6. Log in to the root domain, and restart Oracle Solaris.

If the dynamic SR-IOV function is used, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 7.

# telnet localhost <port number>

...
# shutdown -i6 -g0 -y

7. If you need to disable the hotplug service for the I/O and root domains,
disable the hotplug service.

# svcadm disable hotplug

(3) Deleting the root complex

Deleting the root complex from the root domain

If the I/O device of the chassis requiring maintenance is assigned to the root domain,
delete the physical I/O device (root complex) from the root domain. The work
procedure varies depending on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for the
root complex is used. For details, see Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 Procedure that depends on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for
the root complex is used
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Dynamic
reconfiguration reconfiguration
function function not
used (*1) used (*2)

1 Stop the root domain. ldm stop-domain - Yes

2 Delete the physical I/O device ldm remove-io Yes Yes
(root complex) from the root
domain.
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is supported by XCP 2240 or later and Oracle VM Server for
SPARC 3.2 or later.
*2 If dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is not used, stop the root domain, and then delete the physical
I/O device.

1. Stop the root domain.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 59

 If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the root complex, this
step is unnecessary. Go to step 2.

# ldm stop-domain <root domain name>

2. Delete the physical I/O device (root complex) from the root domain.

# ldm remove-io <physical I/O device name> <root domain name>

3. Confirm that the I/O device of the chassis to be released is unused and
unassigned.

# ldm list-io

Deleting the root complex from the control domain

If the I/O device of the chassis requiring maintenance is assigned to the control
domain, delete the physical I/O device (root complex) from the control domain. The
work procedure varies depending on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function
for the root complex is used. For details, see Table 5-5.

Table 5-5 Procedure that depends on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for
the root complex is used
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Dynamic
reconfiguration reconfiguration
function function not
used (*1) used (*2)

1 Set the control domain to ldm start-reconf - Yes

delayed reconfiguration.
2 Delete the physical I/O device ldm remove-io Yes Yes
from the control domain.
3 Restart the control domain. shutdown -i6 -g0 -y - Yes
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is supported by XCP 2240 or later and Oracle VM Server for
SPARC 3.2 or later. In addition, the control domain must be Oracle Solaris 11.2 SRU11.2.8 or later.
*2 If dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is not used, set the control domain to delayed reconfiguration,
and then delete the physical I/O device.

1. Transition the control domain to delayed reconfiguration mode.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the root complex, this
step is unnecessary. Go to step 2.

# ldm start-reconf <control domain name>

2. Delete the physical I/O device from the control domain.

60 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 # ldm remove-io <physical I/O device name> <control domain name>

3. Restart the control domain.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the root complex, this
step is unnecessary.

# shutdown -i6 -g0 -y

Note - When set to delayed reconfiguration mode, the control domain does not have control
over the guest domains. If you have set the control domain to delayed reconfiguration mode,
restart the control domain as soon as possible.

5.4.2 Enabling the removal of an I/O device

This section describes the procedure for enabling the removal of an I/O device by
using the hot plug function.
To use the hot plug function, the hotplug service of Oracle Solaris needs to be
enabled. Check the status of the service. If it is disabled, enable the hotplug service in
the following procedure. The hot plug function is available only on the control
domain and root domain.

# svcs hotplug ← If the STATE is disabled, enable the service.

# svcadm enable hotplug ← Enables the hotplug service.

For details on the cfgadm(1M) command used here, see "2 Dynamically Configuring
Devices" in the Managing Devices in Oracle Solaris 11.2 or "Dynamically Configuring
Devices (Tasks)" in the Oracle Solaris Administration: Devices and File Systems.

Note - To perform PCI Express card maintenance using the hot plug function, confirm that
the card is hot-pluggable. To do so, check "Appendix A Cards that Support PCI Hot Plug and
Dynamic Reconfiguration" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide.

Enabling the removal of a PCI Express card

1. Log in as a super user to Oracle Solaris on the logical domain (control domain
or root domain) to which the target PCI Express card is assigned.
2. Check the mounting position (Ap_Id) of the target PCI Express card from the
logical domain (control domain or root domain).

# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant Condition
BB#0-PCI#0 pci-pci/hp connected configured ok

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 61

 3. Release the target PCI Express card from the logical domain (control domain
or root domain).

# cfgadm -c unconfigure <Ap_Id>

4. Stop the power supply to the target PCI Express card.

# cfgadm -c disconnect <Ap_Id>

5. Confirm that the PCI Express card has been released from the control domain.

# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant Condition
BB#0-PCI#0 unknown disconnected unconfigured unknown

In the above example, [Receptacle] and [Occupant] display "disconnected" and

"unconfigured," respectively, which indicates that the PCI Express card mounted
at BB#0-PCI#0 has been released from the logical domain.
6. Set the ATTENTION LED of the target PCI Express card cassette to blink.
For removal, this work is not required.

# cfgadm -x led=attn,mode=blink <Ap_Id>

7. Check the following LEDs to determine whether the PCI Express card can be
removed.
- The ATTENTION LED (amber) of the PCI Express card is blinking.
- The POWER LED of the PCI Express card is off.
For removal, the ATTENTION LED (amber) does not blink. Make sure that the
POWER LED is off.

Enabling the removal of an internal disk

(1) Identifying the disk slot

To perform active replacement of an internal disk drive, you need to know the
physical device name or logical device name of a drive to be installed or removed. If
a disk error occurs in the system, from the system console, you can normally check
for messages regarding a disk that is likely to fail or that has already failed. This
information is also recorded in the /var/adm/messages file.

In these error messages, a failed internal disk drive is normally indicated with a
physical device name or logical device name. In addition, depending on the
application, the slot number of the disk may be reported.

Procedure to confirm the mounting position information on the HDD varies

62 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 depending on the operating system.
- For Oracle Solaris 11
For details, see "Using the format command (Oracle Solaris 11)" or "Using the
diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 11)."
- For Oracle Solaris 10
For details, see "Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 10)."
Using the format command (Oracle Solaris 11)
1. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the CMUL serial number of
the chassis that indicates the mounting position information.

XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081238017; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
Partition#1 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081238017;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123001Y1 ;
* BB#00 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 ;
+ Memory_Size:128 GB; Type: A ;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321144;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00322957;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
------------------------Omitted------------------------
BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081230011;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123203N0 ;
* BB#01 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 ;
+ Memory_Size:128 GB; Type: A ;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00320804;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321030;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
+ Code:2c800118KSF1G72PZ-1G6E1 4531-1A94229F;
+ Type:04; Size:8 GB;
------------------------Omitted-----------------------

2. Execute the format command to confirm the physical disk slot.

(1) to (5) in the following example specify the following:

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 63

 (1): Logical path name of the disk
(2): The disk is mounted in the HDD00 slot of BB#01.
(3): The disk is mounted in the HDD01 slot of BB#01.
(4): The disk is mounted in the HDD00 slot of BB#00.
(5): The disk is mounted in the HDD01 slot of BB#00.

# format
Searching for disks...done

AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:

0. c2t50000394281B5312d0 <TOSHIBA-MBF2600RC-3706 cyl 64986 alt 2 hd 27 sec
668> <-- (1)
/pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b5312,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD00/disk <-- (2)
* The last four digits of
the BB#1_CMUL serial number
1. c2t50000394281B59D6d0 <TOSHIBA-MBF2600RC-3706 cyl 64986 alt 2 hd 27 sec
668> <-- (1)
/pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b59d6,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD01/disk <-- (3)
2. c0t500003942823C8C6d0 <TOSHIBA-MBF2600RC-3706 cyl 64986 alt 2 hd 27 sec
668> <-- (1)
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w500003942823c8c6,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD00/disk <-- (4)
* The last four digits of
the BB#0_CMUL serial number
3. c0t50000394281B517Ad0 <TOSHIBA-MBF2600RC-3706 cyl 64986 alt 2 hd 27 sec
668> <-- (1)
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b517a,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD01/disk <-- (5)
Specify disk (enter its number):

Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 11)

1. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the CMUL serial number of
the chassis that indicates the mounting position information.

XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081238017; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
Partition#1 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081238017;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123001Y1 ;
* BB#00 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 ;
+ Memory_Size:128 GB; Type: A ;

64 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321144;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00322957;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
------------------------Omitted------------------------
BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081230011;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123203N0 ;
* BB#01 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 ;
+ Memory_Size:128 GB; Type: A ;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00320804;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321030;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
+ Code:2c800118KSF1G72PZ-1G6E1 4531-1A94229F;
+ Type:04; Size:8 GB;
------------------------Omitted-----------------------

2. Execute the diskinfo command to confirm the physical disk slot.

(1) to (4) in the example below specify the following:
(1): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD0 of BB#01.
(2): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD1 of BB#01.
(3): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD0 of BB#00.
(4): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD1 of BB#00.

# diskinfo
D:devchassis-path c:occupant-compdev
----------------------------------------------------------- ------------------
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD0 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD1 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD2 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD3 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD4 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD5 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD6 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD7 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD0 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD1 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD2 -

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 65

 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD3 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD4 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD5 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD6 -
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD7 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD00/disk
c4t50000394281B5312d0 <-- (1)
* The last four digits of the BB#01_CMUL
serial number
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD01/disk
c4t50000394281B59D6d0 <-- (2)
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD02 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD03 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD04 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD05 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD06 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD07 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD00/disk
c2t500003942823C8C6d0 <-- (3)
*The last four digits of the BB#00_CMUL
serial number
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD01/disk
c2t50000394281B517Ad0 <-- (4)
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD02 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD03 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD04 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD05 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD06 -
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD07 -

Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 10)

1. Execute the diskinfo command to confirm the physical disk slot and logical
system board (LSB).
(1) to (4) in the example below specify the following:
(1): The logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD0.
(2): The device path of the disk mounted on the HDD0 of LSB#0.
(3): The logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD1.
(4): The device path of the disk mounted on the HDD1 of LSB#0.

# diskinfo -ap

Enclosure path: 2081210007-physical-hba-0

Chassis Serial Number: 2081210007-physical-hba-0
Chassis Model: ORCL,SPARC64-X

Enclosure path: /dev/es/ses0

Chassis Serial Number: 500000e0e06d233f
Chassis Model: FUJITSU-BBEXP

Label Disk name Vendor Product Vers

-------- ---------------------- -------- -------------- ----

66 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

HDD_0 c0t50000393D8289180d0 TOSHIBA MBF2600RC 3706 <-- (1)
Physical path
--------------------------------
0: /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393D8289180,0<--(2)
* LSB#0
HDD_1 c0t50000393D82891D0d0 TOSHIBA MBF2600RC 3706 <-- (3)
Physical path
--------------------------------
0: /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393D82891D0,0<--(4)
* LSB#0

Device paths differ depending on the system configuration.

Table 5-6 lists examples of the device paths displayed for logical system boards
(LSBs) in SPARC M10 systems.
This table can be used for mapping of the device paths of internal disk drives
and the logical system board (LSB) numbers. The letters "WWN" in the table
represent the WWN assigned to the disk.

Table 5-6 Disk slot number

LSB No. Device path

LSB#0 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#1 /pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#2 /pci@9000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#3 /pci@9800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#4 /pci@a000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#5 /pci@a800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#6 /pci@b000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#7 /pci@b800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#8 /pci@c000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#9 /pci@c800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#10 /pci@d000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#11 /pci@d800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#12 /pci@e000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#13 /pci@e800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#14 /pci@f000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#15 /pci@f800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0

2. Execute the showboards command to confirm the BB-ID of the chassis in

which the disk requiring maintenance is mounted.
Identify the BB-ID from the LSB number confirmed in step 1. The BB-ID of the
chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board (PSB) number.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 67

 XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment Pwr Conn Conf Test Fault
---- ------------ ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
00-0 00(00) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
* BB#0 * LSB#0
01-0 00(01) Assigned y y y Passed Normal

(2) Releasing an internal disk from the system

1. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to check the configuration of the internal
disk.
To replace or remove an internal disk, use the cfgadm -al command to check the
Ap_ID of the disk requiring maintenance and make a note of it.
If multiple internal disks are mounted, check for the disk that matches the
physical device name confirmed in "(1) Identifying the disk slot."
In the following execution example, Ap_ID is "c2::dsk/c2t50000394281B59D6d0".

# cfgadm -al
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant
Condition
＜Omitted＞
c2 scsi-sas connected configured
unknown
c2::dsk/c2t50000394281B59D6d0 disk connected configured
unknown
c2::es/ses0 ESI connected configured
unknown
c2::smp/expd0 smp connected configured
unknown
c3 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
c4 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
c5 fc connected unconfigured
unknown
c6 fc connected unconfigured
unknown
c7 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
＜Omitted＞

2. Stop all applications from using the internal disk.

3. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to release the internal disk requiring
maintenance from the system.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.

# cfgadm -c unconfigure <Ap_Id>

4. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to confirm that the internal disk requiring

68 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 maintenance is disconnected.
The disconnected internal disk is displayed as "unconfigured."

# cfgadm -al
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant
Condition
＜Omitted＞
c2 scsi-sas connected configured
unknown
c2::dsk/c2t50000394281B4D9Ad0 disk connected unconfigured
unknown
c2::es/ses0 ESI connected configured
unknown
c2::smp/expd0 smp connected configured
unknown
c3 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
c4 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
c5 fc connected unconfigured
unknown
c6 fc connected unconfigured
unknown
c7 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
＜Omitted＞

5. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to blink the CHECK LED of the internal
disk requiring maintenance, and determine its location.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.

# cfgadm -x led=fault,mode=blink <Ap_ID>

6. Check the following LEDs to determine whether the internal disk requiring
maintenance can be removed:
- READY LED (green) of the internal disk: On
- CHECK LED (amber) of the internal disk: Blinking

5.4.3 Releasing a chassis requiring maintenance from

the physical partition
This section describes the procedure for releasing a chassis requiring maintenance by
using dynamic reconfiguration (DR) for the physical partition. The procedure
described here is applicable only to a system with a building block configuration.

Note - For the versions of XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU that support dynamic
reconfiguration (DR) of a physical partition, see the latest Product Notes.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 69

 Note - To use the dynamic reconfiguration (PPAR DR) function for physical partitions, you
need configure the logical domains in advance according to "2.5 Dynamic Reconfiguration
Conditions and Settings" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide.

1. Confirm that the I/O device in the chassis requiring maintenance is not used
in the logical domain.
For details, see "5.3.1 Checking the operating condition of the physical partition
or logical domain" to "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices."
2. Log in to the XSCF shell.
3. When the server requiring maintenance is operating as the master chassis,
execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby
XSCF.
Enter "y" in response to the confirmation message.
If the chassis requiring maintenance is the slave XSCF, go to step 5.

XSCF> switchscf -t Master

The XSCF unit switch between the Master and Standby states.
Continue? [y|n] :y

4. Log in to the XSCF again.

5. Execute the showboards command to check the status of the server
connected to the chassis requiring maintenance.
The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board
(PSB) number.
In the following example, the [Fault] column displays "Degraded" for PSB 00-0,
indicating that the system board is operating with some faulty parts.

XSCF> showboards -va

PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment Pwr Conn Conf Test Fault
---- ------------ ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
00-0 00(00) Assigned y y y Passed Degraded
01-0 00(01) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
02-0 00(02) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
03-0 00(03) Assigned y y y Passed Normal

6. Execute the deleteboard command with the -c disconnect option specified to

release the chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
If you have not manually released any of the following resources beforehand, be
sure to specify the "-m unbind=resource" option: CPU core, memory, and PCIe
root complex. With this option specified, the command automatically deletes the
resource and then releases the system board.

Note - The -m unbind=resource option of the deleteboard command is supported by Oracle

VM Server for SPARC 3.2 or later.

In the following example, PSB 00-0 is released from the physical partition.

70 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 XSCF> deleteboard -c disconnect 00-0

7. Execute the showresult command to check the end status of the deleteboard
command that was just executed.
The following example shows that "0" was returned as the end status since the
execution of the deleteboard command completed successfully.

XSCF> showresult
0

8. Execute the showboards command to confirm that the chassis requiring

maintenance has been released from the physical partition.
In the following example, the [Pwr], [Conn], and [Conf] columns all display "n"
for PSB 00-0, indicating that PSB 00-0 has been released.

XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment Pwr Conn Conf Test Fault
---- ------------ ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
00-0 00(00) Assigned n n n Passed Degraded
01-0 00(01) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
02-0 00(02) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
03-0 00(03) Assigned y y y Passed Normal

9. Execute the ldm list-domain command from the control domain console of the
physical partition to check for any change in the operating condition of the
logical domain after the deletion of the system board.

5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition

Requiring Maintenance
This section describes the procedure for powering off the physical partition requiring
maintenance. This applies if the system has a building block configuration and is
operating in multiple physical partitions.

Note - Before stopping the system, inform the users that the system will be stopped.

Note - When a physical partition is stopped by the operation of the XSCF command or the
operation panel, all the logical domains on the physical partition are stopped. Stop
applications as required.

1. Log in to the XSCF shell.

2. When the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as the master chassis,
execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 71

 XSCF.
Enter "y" in response to the confirmation message.
If the chassis requiring maintenance is the slave XSCF, go to step 4.

XSCF> switchscf -t Master

The XSCF unit switch between the Master and Standby states.
Continue? [y|n] :y

3. Log in to the master XSCF again.

4. Execute the showpparstatus command to check the operating condition of
the physical partition.
In the following example, [PPAR STATUS] displays "Running" for PPAR-ID 00,
indicating that the physical partition is operating.

XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0
PPAR-ID PPAR Status
00 Running

5. Execute the showdomainstatus command to check the operating condition of

the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] displays "Solaris running" for the logical
domains, indicating that Oracle Solaris is operating.

XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name Status
primary Solaris running
4S-159-D0-G0 Solaris running
4S-159-D0-G1 Solaris running
4S-159-D0-G2 Solaris running

6. Execute the showboards command to check the state of the chassis requiring
maintenance.
The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board
(PSB) number.
In the following example, we can see that [PPAR-ID] of PSB 00-0 is "00."

XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment Pwr Conn Conf Test Fault
---- ------------ ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
00-0 00(00) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
01-0 00(01) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
02-0 00(02) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
03-0 00(03) Assigned y y y Passed Normal

7. Execute the poweroff command to stop all the logical domains on the
physical partition requiring maintenance.
Enter "y" in response to the confirmation message.

72 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 XSCF> poweroff -p 0
PPAR-IDs to power off:00
Continue? [y|n] :y
00 : Powering off

*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-off.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showpparprogress".

8. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the

physical partition is turned off.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Powered Off",
which indicates that the power to the physical partition has been turned off.

XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0
PPAR-ID PPAR Status
00 Powered Off

5.6 Stopping the Entire System

This section describes the procedure for stopping the entire system. To undertake
system-stopped maintenance, power off all the physical partitions to stop the entire
system before physically removing any FRU.
Stop the system in either of the following two ways.
■ Stopping the system with the XSCF command
■ Stopping the system from the operation panel

Note - Before stopping the system, inform the users that the system will be stopped.

Note - When a physical partition is stopped by the operation of the XSCF command or the
operation panel, all the logical domains on the physical partition are stopped. Stop
applications as required.

5.6.1 Stopping the system with the XSCF command

1. Confirm that the mode switch on the operation panel is in Service mode.
2. Log in to the XSCF shell.
3. Execute the poweroff command.
Enter "y" in response to the confirmation message.
In the following example, the displayed status of PPAR-IDs 00, 01, and 02 is

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 73

 "Powering off," so you can see that the power-off instruction for the physical
partition completed successfully.

XSCF> poweroff -a
PPAR-IDs to power off:00,01,02
Continue? [y|n] :y
00 : Powering off
01 : Powering off
02 : Powering off

The following processes are performed.

- Oracle Solaris is completely shut down.
- The system stops and enters the POWERON READY state (The XSCF is running).

Note - The order in which guest domains shut down depends on the shut-down group
setting of Oracle VM Server for SPARC.

4. Check that the POWER LED on the operation panel is off.

Note - For a building block configuration, check the POWER LEDs on all the chassis that
make up the system.

5. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the

physical partition is turned off.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] displays "Powered Off" for PPAR-IDs
00, 01, and 02, indicating that the power to all the physical partitions has been
turned off.

XSCF> showpparstatus -a
PPAR-ID PPAR Status
00 Powered Off
01 Powered Off
02 Powered Off

6. Execute the showdomainstatus command to check the operating condition of

the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] displays "Solaris powering down" for the
logical domains, indicating that Oracle Solaris is shutting down.

XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name Status
primary Solaris powering down
4S-159-D0-G0 Solaris powering down
4S-159-D0-G1 Solaris powering down
4S-159-D0-G2 Solaris powering down

74 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

5.6.2 Stopping the system from the operation panel
1. Confirm that the mode switch on the operation panel is in Service mode.
2. Press the power switch on the operation panel for 4 seconds or more.
For details, see "2.3.2 Control function of the operation panel."

Note - For a building block configuration, press the power switch on the master chassis. The
power switches of the other chassis are disabled.

3. Check that the POWER LED on the operation panel is off.

Note - For a building block configuration, check the POWER LEDs on all the chassis that
make up the system.

4. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the

physical partition is turned off.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] displays "Powered Off" for PPAR-IDs
00, 01, and 02, indicating that the power to all the physical partitions has been
turned off.

XSCF> showpparstatus -a
PPAR-ID PPAR Status
00 Powered Off
01 Powered Off
02 Powered Off

5. Execute the showdomainstatus command to check the operating condition of

the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] displays "Solaris powering down" for the
logical domains, indicating that Oracle Solaris is shutting down.

XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name Status
primary Solaris powering down
4S-159-D0-G0 Solaris powering down
4S-159-D0-G1 Solaris powering down
4S-159-D0-G2 Solaris powering down

5.7 Saving XSCF Setting Information

This section describes how to save the following XSCF setting information:

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 75

 ■ Network configuration information, advanced setting information, guest domain
configuration information, etc.
■ CPU Activation key, CPU Activation assignment, etc.
■ PPAR operation mode, time zone setting, user information, etc.
The following example shows the command for saving the XSCF setting information
on the USB device. For details, see "10.10 Saving/Restoring XSCF Setting Information"
in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

XSCF> dumpconfig -v -V file:///media/usb_msd/system.cfg

5.8 Releasing a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S

FRU from the System with the
replacefru Command
The FRUs subject to the operation described here are as follows:
■ Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a system with a building
block configuration)
■ Releasing of the power supply unit and fan unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S

5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible

only in a system with a building block configuration)
In this section, power off the SPARC M10-4S requiring maintenance by using the
replacefru command.
In the following execution example, maintenance is performed on an abnormal
(Degraded) BB#0 chassis with four SPARC M10-4S units in a building block
configuration.
Even in cases where the status of the SPARC M10-4S requiring maintenance is not
abnormal (Degraded), perform the same procedure.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the replacefru command to display the maintenance menu.

XSCF> replacefru

3. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.

Since BB#0 is "Degraded," "1" is entered.

76 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the chassis including replaced FRU.

No. FRU Status

--- ------------------- --------------
1 /BB#0 Degraded
2 /BB#1 Normal
3 /BB#2 Normal
4 /BB#3 Normal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1-4|c:cancel] :1

4. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.

Since the SPARC M10-4S chassis itself is to be maintained, "1" is entered.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the BB or a type of FRU to be replaced.

1. BB itself（*1）
2. FAN (Fan Unit)
3. PSU (Power Supply Unit)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1-3|c:cancel] :1

*1 The above "1. BB itself" is also displayed for the SPARC M10-4. However, the
replacefru command cannot be used for maintenance of the chassis itself in the
SPARC M10-4, so the maintenance work will be interrupted.
5. Select the faulty FRU by specifying it with a numeric key.
Since BB#0 was confirmed faulty in step 3, "1" is also entered here.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select a FRU to be replaced.

No. FRU Status

--- ------------------- --------------
1 /BB#0 Degraded
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1|b:back] :1

6. After confirming that the selected FRU is displayed, enter "r".

You are about to replace BB#0.

Do you want to continue?[r:replace|c:cancel] :r

7. Confirm that the CHECK LED of the FRU is on or blinking.

To release a SPARC M10-4S chassis itself, confirm that the system locator on the

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 77

 chassis is blinking.
For details on the locations of LEDs, see "2.4.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System
locator)" and "2.4.3 LEDs on each component."

Please execute the following steps:

1) Confirm the XSCF STANDBY LED of BB#0 is not lit.
2) Turn off the breaker of BB#0.
3) Remove BB#0.
4) Execute either the following:
4-1) After the exchanged device is connected with the system,
turn on the breaker of BB#0, and please select 'finish'.
4-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device,
please select 'cancel'.
[f:finish|c:cancel] :

You can now start FRU maintenance. Do not enter "f" until you complete the
maintenance work.
After replacing the FRU, perform the work in "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC
M10-4S chassis (possible only in a system with a building block configuration)" to
incorporate the FRU into the system.

5.8.2 Releasing of the power supply unit and fan unit of

the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
In the following execution example, maintenance is performed on the power supply
unit (PSU) of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the replacefru command to display the maintenance menu.

XSCF> replacefru

3. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.

Since the power supply unit (PSU) of the SPARC M10-4 (BB#0) is to be
maintained, "1" is entered.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the chassis including replaced FRU.

No. FRU Status

--- ------------------- --------------
1 /BB#0 Normal
2 /BB#1 Unmount
3 /BB#2 Unmount
4 /BB#3 Unmount
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

78 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Select [1-4|c:cancel] :1

4. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.

Since the power supply unit (PSU) of the SPARC M10-4 is to be maintained, "3"
is entered.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the BB or a type of FRU to be replaced.

1. BB itself
2. FAN (Fan Unit)
3. PSU (Power Supply Unit)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1-3|c:cancel] :3

5. Select the faulty FRU by specifying it with a numeric key.

Since PSU#0 of BB#0 was confirmed faulty, "1" is entered.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select a FRU to be replaced.

No. FRU Status

--- ------------------- --------------
1 /BB#0/PSU#0 Faulted
2 /BB#0/PSU#1 Normal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1|b:back] :1

6. After confirming that the selected FRU is displayed, enter "r".

You are about to replace BB#0/PSU#0.

Do you want to continue?[r:replace|c:cancel] :r

7. Replace the target FRU when a message is output about replacing the FRU.

Please execute the following steps:

1) Remove BB#0/PSU#0.
2) Execute either the following:
2-1) After installing the exchanged device, please select 'finish'.
2-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device,
please select 'cancel'.
[f:finish|c:cancel] :

You can now start FRU maintenance. Do not enter "f" until you complete the
maintenance work.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 79

 After replacing the FRU, perform the work in "6.2.2 Incorporation of the power
supply unit and fan unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S" to incorporate the FRU into
the system.

5.9 Accessing an FRU

This section describes the operations that must be completed before access to the FRU
requiring maintenance.

5.9.1 Removing the crossbar cables from the cable

support
Perform these operations when the SPARC M10-4S has a building block configuration
and when maintaining any of the following FRUs:
- CPU memory unit
- Memory
- PSU backplane unit
- Operation panel
1. Remove the crossbar cables from the cable support.
Perform this procedure only when using equipment rack model 26xx or
equipment rack model 16xx. The procedure may vary depending on the model
of the equipment rack.
If you are not using 19-inch rack model 26xx or 19-inch rack model 16xx, this
work is not required.
Procedure when equipment rack model 26xx is used
a. Remove all the crossbar cables from the crossbar unit.

Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.

b. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener (A in the figure) of the cable support,

securing the crossbar cables.

80 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

Figure 5-1 Hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support

c. Remove the screw securing the cable holder (A in the figure) that is fixed to
the supporting column at the rear of the rack. Then, install the cable holder by
rotating it 180 degrees.

Figure 5-2 Cable holder screw

d. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables in place to the cable
holder.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 81

 Figure 5-3 Fixing crossbar cables

Procedure when equipment rack model 16xx is used

a. Remove all the crossbar cables from the crossbar unit.

Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.

b. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener (A in the figure) of the cable support,

securing the crossbar cables.

Figure 5-4 Hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support

c. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables in place to the cable
holder installed on the supporting column at the rear of the rack.

82 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Figure 5-5 Fixing crossbar cables

5.9.2 Lowering the cable support

To perform maintenance on the following FRUs from the rear of the chassis, lower
the cable support before starting the work:
- PCI Express card
- CPU memory unit
- Memory
- PSU backplane unit
- Operation panel
- Crossbar unit
1. Loosen the right and left screws fixing the cable support, and unlock it by
pulling the upper and lower metal fittings out (in the direction of the arrow).

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 83

 Figure 5-6 Locations of screws holding the cable support

2. Lower the cable support.

5.9.3 Lowering the cable support (if it is a new model)

To perform maintenance on the following FRUs from the rear of the chassis, lower
the cable support before starting the work:
- PCI Express card
- CPU memory unit
- Memory
- PSU backplane unit
- Operation panel
- Crossbar unit

84 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

1. Loosen the right and left screws (A in Figure 5-7) fixing the cable support.

Figure 5-7 Locations of screws holding the cable support

2. Lift the cable support to release the hooks (B in Figure 5-8), and pull it out.

Figure 5-8 Releasing the cable support

3. Lower the cable support.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 85

 Figure 5-9 Handling the cable support

5.9.4 Removing the power cord

To perform work in cold maintenance, remove the power cord of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S. Remove the cable clamp from each power cord, and then remove the
power cords.
1. Release the latch (A in the figure) of the cable clamp.

Figure 5-10 Removing the cable clamp

2. Remove the power cord from the PSU backplane unit.

86 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Figure 5-11 Removing the power cord

5.9.5 Removing the front cover

To perform maintenance on the following FRUs from the front of the chassis, remove
the front cover before starting the work:
- Fan unit
- Power supply unit
- PSU backplane unit
- Operation panel
1. Release the right and left slide locks of the front cover and pull it towards the
front.

Figure 5-12 Releasing the slide locks of the front cover

2. Lift the front cover upwards to remove it.

Chapter 5 Preparations Required for Maintenance 87

88 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 6

Restoring the System

This chapter describes the procedures required to restore the system after FRU
maintenance. See this chapter, as required, when performing maintenance on each
FRU described in Chapter 8 onward.
■ Restoring the Chassis
■ Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a system with a
building block configuration)
■ Incorporating a Chassis and I/O Device into a Physical Partition
■ Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance
■ Starting the Entire System

6.1 Restoring the Chassis

This section describes operations required to restore the chassis.

6.1.1 Installing the power cord

If the power cord of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S was removed to perform the
maintenance work, connect the power cord and then attach the cable clamp to the
power cord.
1. Connect the power cord to the PSU backplane unit.

89
 Figure 6-1 Installing the power cord

2. Clip the power cords with the cable clamp, and secure the cable clamp.
Lock the latch (A in the figure) and then push the cable clamp toward the front
of the chassis to firmly secure the cable clamp.

Figure 6-2 Locking the cable clamp

6.1.2 Fixing the cable support

After performing maintenance on an FRU at the rear of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S,
lift the cable support and fix it in place.
1. Lift the cable support and lock it in place by pushing the upper and lower
screw fittings toward the back (direction of the arrow).

90 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 Figure 6-3 Locking the cable support

2. Tighten the right and left screws to fix the cable support in place.

Note - Check that the cable support is firmly attached and fixed.

6.1.3 Fixing the cable support (if it is a new model)

After performing maintenance on an FRU at the rear of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S,
lift the cable support and fix it in place.
1. Lift the cable support and fasten the hooks (B in Figure 6-4) on the screws (C
in Figure 6-4).

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 91

 Figure 6-4 Handling the cable support

2. Tighten the right and left screws (A in Figure 6-5 Locking the cable support)
to fix the cable support in place.

Figure 6-5 Locking the cable support

6.1.4 Attaching the crossbar cables to the cable support

After maintenance with the crossbar cables removed is done in a building block
configuration of the SPARC M10-4S, restore the cables to their original state.
1. Connect the crossbar cables to the cable support.
Perform this procedure only when equipment rack model 26xx or equipment
rack model 16xx is used. The procedure may vary depending on the model of
the equipment rack.
Procedure when equipment rack model 26xx is used
a. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the crossbar cables from the cable

92 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 holder.
b. Remove the screw securing the cable holder, and then rotate the cable holder
by 180 degrees to install it on the supporting column at the rear of the rack.
c. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit.
d. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables in place to the cable
support.
Procedure when equipment rack model 16xx is used
a. Remove the crossbar cables from the hook-and-loop fastener installed on the
supporting column at the rear of the rack.
b. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit.
c. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables in place to the cable
support.

Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that
you made before the start of maintenance.

6.1.5 Installing the front cover

If the front cover of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S was removed for maintenance to
install an FRU at the front of or inside the chassis, install the front cover after
installing the FRU.
1. To install the front cover, insert the tabs of the front cover into the notches at
the bottom front of the chassis.

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 93

 Figure 6-6 Installing the front cover

Note - Check that the front cover is firmly attached and fixed.

6.2 Incorporating a SPARC M10-4/M10-

4S FRU into the System with the
replacefru Command
The FRUs subject to the operation described here are as follows:
■ Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a system with a
building block configuration)
■ Incorporation of the power supply unit and fan unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S

6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis

(possible only in a system with a building block
configuration)
This section describes the procedure for incorporating an FRU into the system after

94 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 maintenance.
After replacing the FRU in step 7 in "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis
(possible only in a system with a building block configuration)," continue here.
1. After completing maintenance of the target FRU, return to the replacefru
command operation of the XSCF firmware, and enter "f".

Please execute the following steps:

1) Confirm the XSCF STANDBY LED of BB#0 is not lit.
2) Turn off the breaker of BB#0.
3) Remove BB#0.
4) Execute either the following:
4-1) After the exchanged device is connected with the system,
turn on the breaker of BB#0, and please select 'finish'.
4-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device,
please select 'cancel'.
[f:finish|c:cancel] :f

Entering "f" displays the following screen. Wait until the processing has completed.

Waiting for BB#0 to enter install state.

[This operation may take up to 20 minute(s)]
(progress scale reported in seconds)
0..... 30..... 60..... 90..... 120..... 150..... 180..... 210.....
240..... 270..... 300..... 330..... 360..... done

Waiting for BB#0 to enter ready state.

[This operation may take up to 45 minute(s)]
(progress scale reported in seconds)
0..... 30..... 60..... 90..... 120..... 150..... 180..... 210.....
240..... 270..... 300..... done

Do you want to start to diagnose BB#0?[s:start|c:cancel] :

2. After confirming that the FRU to be diagnosed is displayed, enter "s".

Do you want to start to diagnose BB#0?[s:start|c:cancel] :s

Note - If you are replacing the PCI Express card or internal disk, enter "c" to cancel the
SPARC M10-4S diagnosis. After finishing the steps described in this section, see "6.3.1
Diagnosing the system board," and perform a diagnosis by executing the testsb command
with the -v, -p, or -s option specified.

3. After confirming again that the FRU to be diagnosed is displayed, enter "y".

Diagnostic tests for BB#0 have started.

Initial diagnosis is about to start, Continue?[y|n] :y

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 95

 The following screen is displayed. Wait until the processing has completed.

PSB#00-0 power on sequence started.

0....end
Initial diagnosis started. [7200sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120.....150.....180.....210.....240...../
270.....300.....330.....360.....390.....420.....450.....480.....510.....-
540.end
Initial diagnosis has completed.
PSB power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0..... 30.....end
PSB powered off.
PSB Test Fault
---- ------- --------
00-0 Passed Normal
done

4. Confirm that the status is normal ("Normal") after the replacement, and then
enter "f".

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Status of the replaced FRU.

FRU Status
------------------- --------------
/BB#0 Normal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The replacement of BB#0 has completed normally.[f:finish] :f

5. When the maintenance menu appears, enter "c" to exit the operation.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the chassis including replaced FRU.
No. FRU Status
--- ------------------- --------------
1 /BB#0 Normal
2 /BB#1 Normal
3 /BB#2 Normal
4 /BB#3 Normal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1-4|c:cancel] :c

6.2.2 Incorporation of the power supply unit and fan unit

of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
This section describes the procedure for incorporating an FRU into the system after

96 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 maintenance.
After replacing the FRU in step 7 in "5.8.2 Releasing of the power supply unit and
fan unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S," continue here.
1. After completing maintenance of the target FRU, return to the replacefru
command operation of the XSCF firmware, and enter "f".
After maintenance on the power supply unit (PSU), connect the power cord.
Then, after 10 seconds elapse, enter "f".

Please execute the following steps:

1) Remove BB#0/PSU#0.
2) Execute either the following:
2-1) After installing the exchanged device, please select 'finish'.
2-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device,
please select 'cancel'.
[f:finish|c:cancel] :f

Entering "f" displays the following screen. Wait until the processing has completed.

Waiting for BB#0/PSU#0 to enter install state.

[This operation may take up to 10 second(s)]
(progress scale reported in seconds)
0.done
Diagnostic tests for BB#0/PSU#0 have started.
[This operation may take up to 2 minute(s)]
(progress scale reported in seconds)
0..done

2. Confirm that the status is normal ("Normal") after the replacement, and then
enter "f".

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Status of the replaced FRU.

FRU Status
------------------- --------------
/BB#0/PSU#0 Normal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The replacement of BB#0/PSU#0 has completed normally.[f:finish] :f

3. When the maintenance menu appears, enter "c" to exit the operation.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the chassis including replaced FRU.
No. FRU Status
--- ------------------- --------------
1 /BB#0 Normal

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 97

 2 /BB#1 Unmount
3 /BB#2 Unmount
4 /BB#3 Unmount
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Select [1-4|c:cancel] :c

6.3 Diagnosing a Replacement FRU

This section describes the diagnosis function for checking whether a replacement
FRU is operating normally. For details on the command, see the Fujitsu M10/SPARC
M10 Systems Reference Manual of the XCP firmware version used.

6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board

This section shows an example of the command for diagnosing the system board. Use
the testsb command to diagnose the system board.
In the following example, an initial diagnosis of the system board for PSB 01-0 and a
check of the connected I/O are performed.

<Description of options>
-v: Additionally displays a detailed message from the initial diagnosis.
-p: During diagnosis processing, executes the "probe-scsi-all" command of the
OpenBoot PROM and displays the result.
-s: During diagnosis processing, executes the "show-devs" command of the OpenBoot
PROM and displays the result.

XSCF> testsb -v -p -s 01-0

Initial diagnosis is about to start, Continue? [y|n] :y
PSB#01-0 powered on sequence started.
...
<<xxxxxxxx>>
...
{0} ok
...
<<xxxxxxxx>>
...
<<xxxxxxxx>>
...
SB powered off.
PSB Test Fault
---- ------- --------
01-0 Passed Normal

Typically, a diagnosis of the system board is performed arbitrarily after it is

incorporated into the system in maintenance of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (including

98 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015

 the CPU memory unit) with the replacefru command.

6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables

This section shows an example of the command for diagnosing the crossbar unit
mounted in the SPARC M10-4S chassis in a system with a building block configuration.
The command also diagnoses the crossbar cables in the chassis and their connection
status.
The following example shows the command for diagnosing the crossbar cable
between PPAR-ID 0 and BB-ID#1, and the crossbar unit.

<Description of options>
-b:Specifies the BB-ID of the SPARC M10-4S chassis for which bb_id diagnosis is
started.
bb_id can be an integer from 0 to 3 for the SPARC M10-4S (without the crossbar
box) or 0 to 15 for the SPARC M10-4S (with a crossbar box). This option can be
specified with -t or -p.
-p:Specify the PPAR-ID of the physical partition on which the SPARC M10-4S chassis
that is the destination of ppar_id communication is operating. An integer from 0 to
15 can be specified as the ppar_id, depending on the system configuration.

XSCF> diagxbu -b 1 -p 0
XBU diagnosis is about to start, Continue?[y|n] :y
Power on sequence started. [7200sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end
XBU diagnosis started. [7200sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end
completed.
Power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end
completed.
*Note*
Please confirm the error of XBU by "showlogs error".
In addition, please confirm the degraded of XBU by "showstatus".

Even during maintenance on the SPARC M10-4S chassis (including the CPU memory
unit) with the replacefru command, the diagxbu command is not executed. After
SPARC M10-4S maintenance work with the crossbar unit and crossbar cables
removed, use the diagxbu command to diagnose the condition of the crossbar unit
and crossbar cables and the crossbar cable connection status.

6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance

This section describes the procedure for confirming that the FRU is operating
normally after the completion of maintenance.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the showstatus command.

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 99

 Nothing is displayed when it is normal.

XSCF> showstatus

3. Execute the showlogs error command.

Confirm that no new errors are displayed.

XSCF> showlogs error

4. Execute the showhardconf command.

Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of any FRU.

XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081229003; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Running;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2050h; Serial:2081229003;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:320 GB;
------------------------Omitted------------------------
PCI#0 Status:Normal; Name_Property:pci;
+ Vendor-ID:108e; Device-ID:9020;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:0000; Subsystem-ID:0000;
+ Model:;
+ Connection:7001;
PCIBOX#7001; Status:Faulted; Ver:1110h; Serial:2121237001;
+ FRU-Part-Number:;
IOB Status:Normal; Serial:PP123403JE ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B66X 008AG ;
LINKBOARD Status:Normal; Serial:PP1234026P ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B60X 001AA ;
PCI#1 Name_Property:ethernet;
+ Vendor-ID:1077; Device-ID:8000;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:1077; Subsystem-ID:017e;
+ Model:;
------------------------Omitted---------------------

6.4 Restoring XSCF Setting Information

This section describes how to restore the XSCF setting information saved on the USB
device in "5.7 Saving XSCF Setting Information."
To restore the XSCF setting information, use the restoreconfig command as shown in
the following example.

100 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 XSCF> restoreconfig -V file:///media/usb_msd/system.cfg

For details, see "10.10 Saving/Restoring XSCF Setting Information" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

6.5 Incorporating a Chassis and I/O

Device into a Physical Partition
This section describes the procedure for incorporating a chassis into a physical
partition by using dynamic reconfiguration (DR) for the physical partition after
chassis maintenance. The procedure described here is applicable only to a system
with a building block configuration.

6.5.1 Incorporating a chassis into a physical partition

1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2. Execute the addboard command with the -c configure option specified to
incorporate the target chassis into the physical partition.
Enter "y" in response to the confirmation message.

Note - In system board (PSB) incorporation using the addboard command, the target system
board (PSB) is incorporated into the physical partition after a hardware diagnosis of the PSB.
Therefore, it may take time for the command execution to complete.

In the following example, PSB 00-0 is incorporated into PPAR-ID 0.

XSCF> addboard -c configure -p 0 00-0

PSB#00-0 will be configured into PPAR-ID 0. Continue?[y|n] :y
Start connecting PSB to PPAR. [3600sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120.....150.....180.....210.....240.....
270.....300.....330.....360.....390.....420.....450.....480.....510.....
540.....570.....end
Connected PSB to PPAR.
Start configuring PSB to Logical Domains (LDoms) Manager. [1800sec]
0.....end
Configured PSB to Logical Domains (LDoms) Manager.
Operation has completed.

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 101

 Note - If you execute the addboard command without specifying the -m option or with
bind=resource specified for the -m option, the resource assignment state before deleteboard
command execution may not be restored.
If the amount of system board (PSB) resources, such as CPUs and memory, before
replacement differs from that after replacement, you cannot restore the original resource
assignment state to the original state. If the resource assignment state is not restored to the
original state, the resources are placed in the free resource state. In this case, execute the
ldm(1M) command to assign the resources to the logical domain again.

3. Execute the showresult command to check the end status of the addboard
command that was just executed.
The following example shows that "0" is returned as the end status and the
execution of the addboard command has been completed successfully.

XSCF> showresult
0

4. Execute the showboards command to confirm that the chassis requiring

maintenance has been incorporated into the physical partition.
The BB-ID of the server requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board
(PSB) number.
In the following example, [Fault] of PSB 00-0 displays "Normal", which indicates
that the system board is operating normally.

XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment Pwr Conn Conf Test Fault
---- ------------ ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
00-0 00(00) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
01-0 00(01) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
02-0 00(02) Assigned y y y Passed Normal
03-0 00(03) Assigned y y y Passed Normal

5. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the FRU is operating

normally after the completion of maintenance.
Nothing is displayed when it is normal.

XSCF> showstatus

6. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration

and the status of each FRU.
Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of any FRU.

XSCF> showhardconf

7. If the state of the master chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to
the standby state before maintenance, execute the switchscf command to
switch the chassis to the master XSCF.

102 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 XSCF> switchscf -t Standby

8. Add the root complex that was deleted from the control domain before
maintenance.
For details, see "Returning the root complex to the control domain."
9. Restore the root domain to which the root complex was assigned before
maintenance.
For details, see "Returning the root complex to the root domain."
10. If you have released the I/O device assigned to an I/O domain before
maintenance, restore the physical I/O device (PCIe end point device) to its
original status.
For details, see "Return the physical I/O device to the I/O domain."
11. Suppose that the SR-IOV function was used to delete and discard a virtual
function (VF) before maintenance. In this case, create the virtual function
again and assign it to the domain based on the retained output results from
the idm list-io command.
For details, see "Restoring the SR-IOV function."
12. If a virtual device (vnet, vdisk) of a guest domain has been kept unused before
maintenance, return it to its original status.
For details, see "Restoring a virtual device."

6.5.2 Incorporating an I/O device

This section describes the procedure (workflow) for incorporating an I/O device by
using the hot plug function.
To use the hot plug function, the hotplug service of Oracle Solaris needs to be
enabled. Check the status of the service. If it is disabled, enable the hotplug service in
the following procedure. The hot plug function is available only on the control
domain and root domain.

# svcs hotplug ← If the STATE is disabled, enable the service.

# svcadm enable hotplug ← Enables the hotplug service.

For details on the cfgadm(1M) command used here, see "2 Dynamically Configuring
Devices" in the Managing Devices in Oracle Solaris 11.2 or "Dynamically Configuring
Devices (Tasks)" in the Oracle Solaris Administration: Devices and File Systems.

Note - To perform PCIe card maintenance using the hot plug function, confirm that the card
is PHP enabled. To do so, check "Appendix A Cards that Support PCI Hot Plug and
Dynamic Reconfiguration" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide.

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 103

 Incorporation of a PCI Express card
Mount the PCI Express card in the target PCI slot. Then, incorporate it into a logical
domain in the following procedure.

Note - In an environment on Oracle Solaris 11.2 or later, a PCI card is automatically

incorporated only by inserting the PCI card into the on-board slot. Therefore, you do not
need to perform an incorporation operation using the cfgadm command.

1. Log in as a super user to Oracle Solaris on the logical domain (control domain
or root domain) into which the target PCI Express card is to be incorporated.
2. Check the mounting position Ap_Id of the target PCI Express card.

# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant Condition
BB#0-PCI#0 unknown disconnected unconfigured unknown

3. Start the power supply to the target PCI Express card.

# cfgadm -c connect <Ap_Id>

4. Incorporate the target PCI Express card into the logical domain.

# cfgadm -c configure <Ap_Id>

5. Confirm that the target PCI Express card has been incorporated into the
logical domain.

# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant Condition
BB#0-PCI#0 pci-pci/hp connected configured ok

6. If the ATTENTION LED of the target cassette is blinking when you replace the
PCI Express card, turn off the ATTENTION LED.

# cfgadm -x led=attn,mode=off <Ap_Id>

7. If you have enabled the hotplug service, execute the svcadm command to
disable the hotplug service.
8. Assign the I/O device of the incorporated PCIe card to the logical domain.
a. If you have released the I/O device assigned to an I/O domain before
maintenance, restore the physical I/O device (PCIe end point device) to its
original status.
For details, see "Return the physical I/O device to the I/O domain."

104 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 b. Suppose that the SR-IOV function was used to delete and discard a virtual
function (VF) before maintenance. In this case, create the virtual function
again and assign it to the domain based on the retained output results from
the idm list-io command.
For details, see "Restoring the SR-IOV function."
c. If a virtual device (vnet, vdisk) of a guest domain has been kept unused before
maintenance, return it to its original status.
For details, see "Restoring a virtual device."
9. If you have added a new PCI Express card, see the following manual to
perform appropriate operations:
- When using dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device
See "15.3.1 Adding a physical I/O device to an I/O domain" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
- When not using dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device
See "3.2.15 Configuring an I/O device" and "3.2.16 Creating or destroying
the SR-IOV virtual function" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain
Configuration Guide.

Note - Dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device is supported by XCP 2230 or
later and Oracle VM Server for SPARC 3.1.1.1 or later.

Incorporation of an internal disk

1. Log in as a super user to Oracle Solaris on the logical domain (control domain
or root domain) into which the target internal disk is to be incorporated.
2. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to check the status of the incorporated
internal disk.
With the cfgadm -al command, confirm that AP_ID of the replacement internal
disk has been changed.
Confirm that Occupant shows "configured." If it does not show "configured,"
perform step 3.

# cfgadm -al
Ap_Id Type Receptacle Occupant
Condition
＜Omitted＞
c2 scsi-sas connected configured
unknown
c2::dsk/c2t50000394281B50C6d0 disk connected configured
unknown
c2::es/ses0 ESI connected configured
unknown
c2::smp/expd0 smp connected configured
unknown
c3 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
c4 scsi-sas connected unconfigured

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 105

 unknown
c5 fc connected unconfigured
unknown
c6 fc connected unconfigured
unknown
c7 scsi-sas connected unconfigured
unknown
＜Omitted＞

3. If the system does not recognize the incorporated internal disk, make it
recognized in the system.
a. Execute the cfgadm -c configure command to incorporate the target internal
disk into the logical domain.

# cfgadm -c configure <Ap_Id>

b. With the cfgadm -al command, check the status of the internal disk.
4. If you have enabled the hotplug service, execute the svcadm command to
disable the hotplug service.

# svcadm disable hotplug

5. Assign the I/O device of the incorporated internal disk to the logical domain.
- If you have replaced a faulty internal disk, proceed to "6.5.3 Restoring a
logical domain to the pre-maintenance state."
- If you have added a new internal disk, perform operations according to the
descriptions in "14.2 Configuring Hardware RAID" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC
M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

6.5.3 Restoring a logical domain to the pre-maintenance

state
This section describes the flow of work in restoring a logical domain after FRU
maintenance to the pre-maintenance state. For details on the work and the
commands used, see "3.2 Operations and Commands Related to Logical Domain
Configurations" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide
and Oracle VM Server for SPARC 3.1 Reference Manual.

Note - If you have replaced the CPU memory unit lower in a system that has internal disks in
a hardware RAID configuration, you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume. For
details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

The following procedure returns a logical domain to the state in the ldm list-io
output results that were checked in step 4 in "5.3.2 Checking the assignment status
of I/O devices."

106 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Returning the root complex to the control domain
Return the root complex that was released from the control domain to the control
domain.
The work procedure varies depending on whether the dynamic reconfiguration
function for the root complex is used. For details, see Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Procedure that depends on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for
the root complex is used
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Dynamic
reconfiguration reconfiguration
function function not
used (*1) used (*2)

1 Set the control domain to ldm start-reconf - Yes

delayed reconfiguration.
2 Assign the physical I/O device ldm add-io Yes Yes
to the control domain.
3 Restart the control domain. shutdown -i6 -g0 -y - Yes
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is supported by XCP 2240 or later and Oracle VM Server for
SPARC 3.2 or later. In addition, the control domain must be Oracle Solaris 11.2 SRU11.2.8 or later.
*2 If dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is not used, set the control domain to delayed reconfiguration,
and then assign the physical I/O device.

1. Log in to Oracle Solaris on the control domain of the physical partition.

2. Transition the control domain to delayed reconfiguration mode.
If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the root complex, this
step is unnecessary. Go to step 3.

# ldm start-reconf <control domain name>

3. Reassign the physical I/O device to the control domain.

# ldm add-io <physical I/O device name> <control domain name>

4. Restart Oracle Solaris on the control domain.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the root complex, this
step is unnecessary.

# shutdown -i6 -g0 -y

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 107

 Note - When set to delayed reconfiguration mode, the control domain does not have control
over the guest domains. If you have set the control domain to delayed reconfiguration mode,
restart the control domain as soon as possible.

Returning the root complex to the root domain

Return the physical I/O device (root complex) that was released from the root
domain to the root domain.
The work procedure varies depending on whether the dynamic reconfiguration
function for the root complex is used. For details, see Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Procedure that depends on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for
the root complex is used
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Dynamic
reconfiguration reconfiguration
function function not
used (*1) used (*2)

1 Assign the physical I/O device ldm add-io Yes Yes

(root complex) to the root
domain.
2 Start the root domain. ldm start-domain - Yes
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is supported by XCP 2240 or later and Oracle VM Server for
SPARC 3.2 or later. In addition, the root domain must be Oracle Solaris 11.2 SRU11.2.8 or later.
*2 If dynamic reconfiguration of the root complex is not used, assign the physical I/O device (root complex), and
then start the root domain.

1. Reassign the I/O device (PCIe root complex) released from the root domain to
the root domain.

# ldm add-io <physical I/O device name> <root domain name>

2. Start the root domain.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the root complex, this
step is unnecessary.

# ldm start-domain <root domain name>

Return the physical I/O device to the I/O domain

If you released the I/O device assigned to an I/O domain before maintenance

108 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
according to "When using virtual I/O" in "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O
devices," restore the physical I/O device (PCIe end point device) to its original status.
PCIe slots are automatically assigned to the root domain. Therefore, to reassign them
to I/O domains, they must be released from the root domain and then reassigned.
The work procedure varies depending on whether the dynamic reconfiguration
function for the PCIe end point device is used. For details, see Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 Procedure that depends on whether the dynamic reconfiguration function for
the PCIe end point device is used
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Dynamic
reconfiguration reconfiguration
function used function not
(*1) used

1 Enable the hotplug service. svcadm enable hotplug Yes Yes (*2)
2 Set the root domain to delayed ldm start-reconf - Yes
reconfiguration.
3 Delete the physical IO from the ldm remove-io Yes Yes
root domain.
4 Restart the root domain. shutdown -i6 -g0 -y - Yes
5 Assign physical I/O to the root ldm add-io Yes Yes
domain.
6 Start the I/O domain. ldm start-domain - Yes
7 Disable the hotplug service. svcadm disable hotplug Yes Yes (*2)
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device is supported by XCP 2230 or later and Oracle VM Server
for SPARC 3.1.1.1 or later.
*2 If dynamic reconfiguration of the PCIe end point device is not used, the hotplug service operates regardless of
its enable/disable setting.

1. If the hotplug service is disabled for the I/O and root domains, execute the
svcadm enable command to enable the hotplug service.

# svcadm enable hotplug

2. Transition the root domain to delayed reconfiguration mode.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 5.

# ldm start-reconf <root domain name>

3. Delete the physical I/O device from the root domain.

# ldm remove-io <device name> <root domain name>

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 109

 4. Log in to the root domain, and restart Oracle Solaris on the root domain.
If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 5.

# telnet localhost <port number>

...
# shutdown -i6 -g0 -y

5. Assign the physical I/O device to the I/O domain.

# ldm add-io <device name> <I/O domain name>

6. Start the I/O domain.

If you are using the dynamic reconfiguration function for the PCIe end point
device, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 7.

# ldm start <I/O domain name>

7. If you need to disable the hotplug service for the I/O and root domains,
disable the hotplug service.

# svcadm disable hotplug

Restoring the SR-IOV function

Suppose that the SR-IOV function was used to delete and discard a virtual function
(VF) before maintenance, according to "When using the SR-IOV virtual function" in
"5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices." In this case, create the virtual
function again and assign it to the domain based on the retained output results from
the idm list-io command.
The work procedure differs between the dynamic SR-IOV function and the static
SR-IOV function. For details, see Table 6-4.

Table 6-4 Procedure that depends on the function: dynamic SR-IOV function or static
SR-IOV function
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Static SR-IOV
SR-IOV function used
function used
(*1)

1 Enable the hotplug service. svcadm enable hotplug Yes Yes (*2)

110 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 6-4 Procedure that depends on the function: dynamic SR-IOV function or static
SR-IOV function (continued)
-: Unnecessary
Item Task Command Dynamic Static SR-IOV
SR-IOV function used
function used
(*1)

2 Set the PF root domain to ldm start-reconf - Yes

delayed reconfiguration.
3 Create a VF. ldm create-vf Yes Yes
4 Assign the VF to the I/O domain. ldm add-io Yes Yes
5 Restart the root domain. shutdown -i6 -g0 -y - Yes
6 Start the I/O domain. start-domain - Yes
7 Disable the hotplug service. svcadm disable hotplug Yes Yes (*2)
*1 Dynamic reconfiguration for the SR-IOV virtual function is supported by XCP 2210 or later and Oracle VM
Server for SPARC 3.1 or later.
*2 If static reconfiguration for the SR-IOV virtual function is used, the hotplug service operates regardless of its
enable/disable setting.

1. If the hotplug service is disabled for the I/O and root domains, execute the
svcadm enable command to enable the hotplug service.

# svcadm enable hotplug

2. Transition the root domain that has the assigned physical function (PF) to
delayed reconfiguration mode.
If the dynamic SR-IOV function is used, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 3.

# ldm start-reconf <root domain name>

3. Create the virtual function.

# ldm create-vf <PF name>

4. Assign the virtual function (VF) to the I/O domain.

# ldm add-io <VF name> <I/O domain name>

5. Log in to the root domain, and restart Oracle Solaris.

If the dynamic SR-IOV function is used, this step is unnecessary. Go to step 7.

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 111

 # telnet localhost <port name>
...
# shutdown -i6 -g0 -y

6. Start the I/O domain.

# ldm start <I/O domain name>

7. If you need to disable the hotplug service for the I/O and root domains,
disable the hotplug service.

# svcadm disable hotplug

8. If a virtual device of a guest domain has been kept unused or the redundant
configuration was released in "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O
devices," resume the use of the virtual device or set the redundant configuration
again.
For details on the work, see the manual for the application being used.
9. Confirm that the status of the physical I/O device is the same as before
maintenance.

# ldm list-io

10. Confirm that the operating condition of the logical domain remains unchanged.

# ldm list-domain

Restoring a virtual device

If a virtual device (vnet, vdisk) of a guest domain has been kept unused before
maintenance, return it to its original status.
1. If a virtual device of a guest domain has been kept unused or the redundant
configuration was released, resume the use of the virtual device or set the
redundant configuration again.
For details on the work, see the manual for the application being used.
2. Confirm that the status of the physical I/O device is the same as before
maintenance.

# ldm list-io

3. Confirm that the operating condition of the logical domain remains unchanged.

112 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 # ldm list-domain

6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked

Mode
1. Return the mode switch of the operation panel to Locked mode.
For a building block configuration, return the mode switches of the master
chassis and those chassis (BB-ID#00, #01) whose XSCFs are in the standby state
to Locked mode.
For details, see "2.3.2 Control function of the operation panel."

Remarks - For a building block configuration with a connected crossbar box, return the
mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 of the crossbar box to Locked mode.

6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition

Requiring Maintenance
This section describes the procedure for powering on a physical partition requiring
maintenance.
1. Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis
(BB-ID#00, #01) whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode.
2. Log in to the XSCF shell.
3. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the FRU is operating
normally after the completion of maintenance.
Nothing is displayed when it is normal.

XSCF> showstatus

4. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration

and the status of each FRU.

XSCF> showhardconf

5. If the state of the master chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to
the standby state before maintenance, execute the switchscf command to

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 113

 switch the chassis to the master XSCF.

XSCF> switchscf -t Standby

6. Execute the poweron command to power on the stopped physical partition.

In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is specified.

XSCF> poweron -p 0

6.8 Starting the Entire System

This section describes the procedure for starting the entire system.
The system can be started in either of the following two ways:
■ Starting the system with an XSCF command
■ Starting the system from the operation panel

6.8.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command

1. Check that the XSCF STANDBY LED on the operation panel is on.
2. Log in to the XSCF shell.
3. Execute the poweron command.
Enter "y" in response to the confirmation message.

XSCF> poweron -a
PPAR-IDs to power on:00,01
Continue? [y|n] :y
00 : Powering on
01 : Powering on

4. Confirm that the POWER LED on the operation panel is on.

5. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to all the
physical partitions in the system is turned on.

6.8.2 Starting the system from the operation panel

1. Check that the XSCF STANDBY LED on the operation panel is on.
2. Press the power switch on the operation panel for 1 second or more (less
than 4 seconds).

114 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 For details, see "2.3.2 Control function of the operation panel."

Note - For a building block configuration, press the power switch on the master chassis. The
power switches of the other chassis are disabled.

3. Confirm that the POWER LED on the operation panel is on.

4. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to all the
physical partitions in the system is turned on.

Chapter 6 Restoring the System 115

116 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 7

Maintenance Flow

This chapter describes the maintenance workflow.

Be sure to check the notes on FRUs requiring maintenance in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC
M10 Systems Product Notes for the latest XCP version.
■ Maintenance Workflow
■ FRU Replacement Workflow
■ FRU Installation Workflow
■ FRU Removal Workflow

7.1 Maintenance Workflow

Restrictions may apply depending on the hardware, firmware, and software
configurations of the system requiring maintenance. Before performing maintenance
work, check the configuration of the target system as described in "4.1 Confirming
the System Configuration," and check the restriction information in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems Product Notes corresponding to the firmware version used.
Perform the work according to the following maintenance workflow.

Figure 7-1 Maintenance workflow

Start of replacement work Start of installation work Start of removal work

1. Identify FRU to be replaced 2. Check available maintenance types

Determine maintenance
types (*1)

3. Active maintenance (*2) 4. Inactive maintenance 5. System-stopped maintenance

117
 Table 7-1 Maintenance workflow
Item Procedure Reference

1 Identifying the FRU to be replaced "4.2.2 Identifying a failure"

2 Checking the available maintenance "Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types
types (*1) by FRU"
3 Active maintenance (*2)
3-a Active replacement "7.2.1 Active replacement"
3-b Active addition "7.3.1 Active addition"
3-c Active removal "7.4.1 Active removal"
4 Inactive maintenance
4-a Inactive replacement "7.2.2 Inactive replacement"
4-b Inactive addition "7.3.2 Inactive addition"
4-c Inactive removal "7.4.2 Inactive removal"
5 System-stopped maintenance
5-a System-stopped replacement "7.2.3 System-stopped replacement"
5-b System-stopped addition "7.3.3 System-stopped addition"
5-c System-stopped removal "7.4.3 System-stopped removal"
*1 The configuration of the system requiring maintenance and the FRU to be replaced may
affect system operation, such as in maintenance time and in stopping the logical domains.
Consult with the system administrator to decide the maintenance type to be used.
*2 To perform PCIe card maintenance using PHP, confirm that the card is PHP enabled. To
do so, check "Appendix A Cards that Support PCI Hot Plug and Dynamic Reconfiguration" in
the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems PCI Card Installation Guide.

118 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types by FRU
For a single-chassis configuration/building block configuration, -: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU Active Inactive System
stopped

Hot Cold Hot Cold Hot Cold

maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance
(*7)

CPU memory unit (*1) - /- - / OK - /- - / OK - /- OK / OK

Memory - /- - / OK - /- - / OK - /- OK / OK
Crossbar unit (*2) - /- - /- - /- - / OK - /- OK / OK
Power supply unit (*3) OK / OK - / OK OK / OK - / OK OK / OK OK / OK
Fan unit (*3) OK / OK - / OK OK / OK - / OK OK / OK OK / OK
Internal disk (*4) OK / OK - / OK OK / OK - / OK OK / OK OK / OK
PCI Express card (*5) OK / OK - / OK OK / OK - / OK OK / OK OK / OK
PSU backplane unit - /- - / OK - /- - / OK - /- OK / OK
Operation panel - /- - / OK - /- - / OK - /- OK / OK
Crossbar cable (*6) - /- - /- - /- - / OK - /- - / OK
XSCF BB control cable (*6) - /- - / OK - /- - / OK - /- - / OK
XSCF DUAL control cable (*6) - /- - / OK - /- - / OK - /- - / OK
*1 You can shorten the work time for replacing the CPU memory unit lower by performing the work in "9.7 Switching the microSD
Card."
*2 The unit is mounted only in the SPARC M10-4S.
*3 Active/hot maintenance is supported only if the target FRU is in a redundant configuration. We recommend active/hot maintenance
that has a short work time.
*4 This is supported only when used for an internal disk that is not a boot device or for a boot device that has a redundant configuration
(RAID configuration). We recommend active/hot maintenance that has a short work time.
*5 Maintenance work is performed using PHP. If the direct I/O function is set, the PCI Express card cannot use PHP.
*6 The cable is mounted only with a configuration of two or more building blocks.
*7 This method of maintenance uses the dynamic reconfiguration (DR) function to disconnect the chassis requiring maintenance from the
physical partition. It is available only for a system with a configuration of two or more building blocks.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 119

7.2 FRU Replacement Workflow
This section describes the replacement workflow for the following FRUs of the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S:
- PCI Express card
- CPU memory unit (upper/lower)
- Memory
- Internal disk
- Fan unit
- Power supply unit
- PSU backplane unit
- Operation panel
- Crossbar cable
- Crossbar unit
- XSCF BB control cable
- XSCF DUAL control cable

7.2.1 Active replacement

This section describes the workflows for active/hot and active/cold FRU replacement.
References to detailed descriptions are written in the work procedure tables. See any
of them as required. You can perform active/cold replacement only for a system with
a building block configuration.
Active replacement has the following patterns:
■ Active/hot replacement (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
■ Active/hot replacement (for an internal disk in a RAID configuration)
■ Active/hot replacement (for an internal disk not in a RAID configuration)
■ Active/hot replacement (for a PCI Express card)
■ Active/cold replacement (building block configuration only)

120 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Active/hot replacement (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
Active/hot replacement can be performed on a power supply unit and a fan unit.
Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-2 Active/hot replacement flow (for a power supply unit or fan unit)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system

3. Release faulty FRU from system

4. Remove front cover

5. Replace faulty FRU

6. Install front cover

7. Incorporate replaced FRU into system

8. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

9. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 121

Table 7-3 Active/hot replacement work procedure (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3.1 Checking the operating condition of the physical
system partition or logical domain"
3 Releasing a faulty FRU from the system "5.8.2 Releasing of the power supply unit and fan unit of
the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S"
4 Removing the front cover "5.9.5 Removing the front cover"
5 Replacing a faulty FRU "Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
"Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
6 Installing the front cover "6.1.5 Installing the front cover"
7 Incorporating the replacement FRU into the "6.2.2 Incorporation of the power supply unit and fan unit
system of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S"
8 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
9 Closing the rack door

122 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Active/hot replacement (for an internal disk in a RAID configuration)
Active/hot replacement can be performed on an internal disk. If the internal disk is in
a RAID configuration, perform the following procedure to replace it.

Figure 7-3 Active/hot replacement flow (for an internal disk in a RAID

configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Identify faulty internal disk

3. Replace internal disk

4. Incorporate replaced internal disk into system

5. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

6. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

Table 7-4 Active/hot replacement work procedure (for an internal disk in a RAID configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Identifying a faulty internal disk "14.2.9 Checking for a failed disk drive" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration
Guide
3 Replacing a faulty internal disk "Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
4 Incorporating the replacement internal disk "14.2.10 Replacing a failed disk drive" in the Fujitsu
into the system M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration
Guide
5 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
6 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 123

 Active/hot replacement (for an internal disk not in a RAID configuration)
Active/hot replacement can be performed on an internal disk. If the internal disk is
not in a RAID configuration, perform the following procedure to replace it.

Figure 7-4 Active/hot replacement flow (for an internal disk not in a RAID
configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and I/O

device usage status

3. Release faulty internal disk from system

4. Replace faulty internal disk

5. Incorporate replaced internal disk into system

6. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

7. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

Table 7-5 Active/hot replacement work procedure (for an internal disk not in a RAID configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
3 Releasing a faulty internal disk from the "5.4.2 Enabling the removal of an I/O device" in "Enabling
system the removal of an internal disk"
4 Replacing a faulty internal disk "Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
5 Incorporating the replacement internal disk "6.5.2 Incorporating an I/O device"
6 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
7 Closing the rack door

124 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Active/hot replacement (for a PCI Express card)
Active/hot replacement can be performed on a PCI Express card. Perform the
following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-5 Active/hot replacement flow (for a PCI Express card)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and I/O

device usage status

3. Release assignment of PCIe card

4. Enable removal of faulty PCIe card

5. Lower cable support

6. Replace faulty PCIe card

7. Fix cable support

8. Incorporate replaced PCIe card

9. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

10. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 125

Table 7-6 Active/hot replacement work procedure (for a PCI Express card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
3 Releasing the assignment of a PCIe card "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices"
4 Enabling the removal of a faulty PCIe card "5.4.2 Enabling the removal of an I/O device"
5 Lowering the cable support "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
6 Replacing a faulty PCIe card "Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
7 Fixing the cable support "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
8 Incorporating the replacement PCIe card "6.5.2 Incorporating an I/O device"
9 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
10 Closing the rack door

126 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Active/cold replacement (building block configuration only)
Active/cold replacement can be performed on each FRU in a building block
configuration. Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-6 Active/cold replacement flow (building block configuration only)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Release assignment of PCIe card

4. Release chassis requiring maintenance

from partition

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Replace faulty FRU

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

11. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into partition

12. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

13. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 127

Table 7-7 Active/cold replacement work procedure (building block configuration only)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
3 Releasing the assignment of a PCIe card "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices"
4 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.4.3 Releasing a chassis requiring maintenance from the
from the partition physical partition"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
from the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Replacing a faulty FRU See the removal and installation procedures in the
maintenance procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 16).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
(*1)(*2)
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
"Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
"Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
"Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/
Operation Panel" (*1)
"Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables"
"Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring maintenance "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
maintenance into the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*3)
maintenance "6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.5.1 Incorporating a chassis into a physical partition"
maintenance into a partition
12 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
13 Closing the rack door
*1 Simultaneous replacement of the CPU memory unit and PSU backplane unit is prohibited. To replace the CPU memory unit and PSU
backplane unit, first replace either of the units and perform the work in "9. Incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the
system." Then, return to "5. Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance from the system," and replace the other unit. Lastly, restore the
system.
*2 If a CPU memory unit lower is replaced in the system of the hardware RAID volume in a hardware RAID configuratioｎ using internal
disks, you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume before starting Oracle Solaris. Start Oracle Solaris on the control domain as
described in "11. Incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into a partition." For details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID
volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
*3 Normally, the testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system
board before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

128 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
7.2.2 Inactive replacement
This section describes the workflows for inactive/hot and inactive/cold FRU
replacement. References to detailed descriptions are written in the workflow. See any
of them as required. You can perform the operations here only for a system with a
building block configuration.
Inactive replacement has the following patterns:
■ Inactive/hot replacement (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
■ Inactive/hot replacement (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
■ Inactive/cold replacement (building block configuration only)

Inactive/hot replacement (for a power supply unit or fan unit)

Inactive/hot replacement can be performed on a power supply unit and a fan unit.
Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 129

 Figure 7-7 Inactive/hot replacement flow (for a power supply unit or fan unit)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of chassis

requiring maintenance

4. Power off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Release FRU requiring maintenance from

system

6. Remove front cover

7. Replace faulty FRU

8. Install front cover

9. Incorporate replaced FRU into system

10. Diagnose replaced FRU

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

replacement FRU

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

14. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

130 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-8 Inactive/hot replacement work procedure (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3.1 Checking the operating condition of the physical partition or
of the chassis requiring maintenance logical domain"
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance"
maintenance
5 Releasing a faulty FRU from the "5.8.2 Releasing of the power supply unit and fan unit of the
system SPARC M10-4/M10-4S"
6 Removing the front cover "5.9.5 Removing the front cover"
7 Replacing a faulty FRU "Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
"Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
8 Installing the front cover "6.1.5 Installing the front cover"
9 Incorporating the replacement FRU "6.2.2 Incorporation of the power supply unit and fan unit of the
into the system SPARC M10-4/M10-4S"
10 Diagnosing the replacement FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
11 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the replacement FRU
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance"
maintenance
14 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 131

 Inactive/hot replacement (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Inactive/hot replacement can be performed on an internal disk and a PCIe card.
Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-8 Inactive/hot replacement flow (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and I/O

device usage status

4. Power off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Lower cable support for maintenance on

PCIe card

6. Replace faulty FRU

7. Secure cable support after maintenance on

PCIe card

8. Diagnose replaced FRU

9. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

12. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

132 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-9 Inactive/hot replacement work procedure (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
5 Lowering the cable support for maintenance "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
on a PCIe card
6 Replacing a faulty FRU "Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Securing the cable support after maintenance "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
on a PCIe card
8 Diagnosing the replacement FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
12 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 133

 Inactive/cold replacement (building block configuration only)
Inactive/cold replacement can be performed on each FRU in a building block
configuration. Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-9 Inactive/cold replacement flow (building block configuration only)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Powering off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Replace faulty FRU

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

14. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

134 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-10 Inactive/cold replacement work procedure (building block configuration only)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
from the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Replacing a faulty FRU See the removal and installation procedures in the
maintenance procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 17).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
(*1)(*2)
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
"Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
"Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
"Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/
Operation Panel" (*1)
"Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables"
"Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units"
"Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables"
"Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring maintenance "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
maintenance into the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*3)
maintenance
"6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 135

Table 7-10 Inactive/cold replacement work procedure (building block configuration only) (continued)
Item Work procedure Reference

14 Closing the rack door

*1 Simultaneous replacement of the CPU memory unit and PSU backplane unit is prohibited. To replace the CPU memory unit and PSU
backplane unit, first replace either of the units and perform the work up to "9. Incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the
system." Then, return to "5. Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance from the system," and replace the other unit.
*2 If a CPU memory unit lower is replaced in the system of the hardware RAID volume in a hardware RAID configuratioｎ using internal
disks, you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume before starting Oracle Solaris. Start Oracle Solaris on the control domain as
described in "13. Powering on the chassis requiring maintenance." For details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
*3 The testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system board
before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

136 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
7.2.3 System-stopped replacement
This section describes the workflows for system-stopped/hot and system-stopped/
cold FRU replacement. References to detailed descriptions are written in the
workflow. See any of them as required.
System-stopped replacement has the following patterns:
■ System-stopped/hot replacement (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
■ System-stopped/hot replacement (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
■ System-stopped/cold replacement (for a single-chassis configuration)
■ System-stopped/cold replacement (for a building block configuration)

System-stopped/hot replacement (for a power supply unit or fan unit)

System-stopped/hot replacement can be performed on a power supply unit and a fan
unit. Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 137

 Figure 7-10 System-stopped/hot replacement flow (for a power supply unit or
fan unit)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system

4. Stop system

5. Release faulty FRU from system

6. Remove front cover

7. Replace faulty FRU

8. Install front cover

9. Incorporate replaced FRU into system

10. Diagnose replaced FRU

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Start system

14. Close rack door

Completion of maintenance

138 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-11 System-stopped/hot replacement work procedure (for a power supply unit or fan unit)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system Usage Status"
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Releasing a faulty FRU from the system "5.8.2 Releasing of the power supply unit and fan unit of
the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S"
6 Removing the front cover "5.9.5 Removing the front cover"
7 Replacing a faulty FRU "Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
"Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
8 Installing the front cover "6.1.5 Installing the front cover"
9 Incorporating the replacement FRU into the "6.2.2 Incorporation of the power supply unit and fan unit
system of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S"
10 Diagnosing the replacement FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
11 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
14 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 139

 System-stopped/hot replacement (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
System-stopped/hot replacement can be performed on an internal disk and a PCIe
card. Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-11 System-stopped/hot replacement flow (for an internal disk or PCIe

card)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Lower cable support for maintenance on

PCIe card

6. Replace faulty FRU

7. Secure cable support after maintenance on

PCIe card

8. Diagnose replaced FRU

9. Confirm that there is no problem with the

replaced FRU

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Start system

12. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

140 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-12 System-stopped/hot replacement work procedure (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Lowering the cable support for maintenance "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
on a PCIe card
6 Replacing a faulty FRU "Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Securing the cable support after maintenance "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
on a PCIe card
8 Diagnosing the replacement FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
12 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 141

 System-stopped/cold replacement (for a single-chassis configuration)
System-stopped/cold replacement can be performed on each FRU in a single-chassis
configuration. Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-12 System-stopped/cold replacement flow (for a single-chassis

configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and I/O

device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

6. Replace faulty FRU

7. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

8. Perform diagnosis test

9. Confirm that there is no problem with the

replaced FRU

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Start system

12. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

142 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-13 System-stopped/cold replacement work procedure (for a single-chassis configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Enabling access to the FRU "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
requiring maintenance
6 Replacing a faulty FRU See the removal and installation procedures in the maintenance
procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 17).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory" (*1)(*2)
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
"Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
"Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
"Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel"
(*1)
"Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units"
7 Restoring the chassis requiring "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
maintenance
8 Performing a diagnosis test "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the replacement FRU
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
12 Closing the rack door
*1 Simultaneous replacement of the CPU memory unit and PSU backplane unit is prohibited. To replace the CPU memory unit and PSU
backplane unit, first replace either of the units and perform the work up to "9. Confirming that there is no problem with the replacement
FRU." Then, return to "5. Enabling access to the FRU requiring maintenance," and replace the other unit.
*2 If a CPU memory unit lower is replaced in the system of the hardware RAID volume in a hardware RAID configuratioｎ using internal
disks, you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume before performing the work in "11. Starting the system." For details, see "14.2.11
Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 143

 System-stopped/cold replacement (for a building block configuration)
System-stopped/cold replacement can be performed on each FRU in a building block
configuration. Perform the following procedure to replace the unit.

Figure 7-13 System-stopped/cold replacement flow (for a building block

configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Replace faulty FRU

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose replaced FRU

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

replaced FRU

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Start system

14. Close rack door

Maintenance complete

144 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-14 System-stopped/cold replacement work procedure (for a building block configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a
maintenance from the system system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
requiring maintenance
7 Replacing a faulty FRU See the removal and installation procedures in the maintenance
procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 16).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory" (*1)(*2)
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
"Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units"
"Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units"
"Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel"
(*1)
"Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables"
"Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units"
"Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables"
"Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
maintenance
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in
maintenance into the system a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the replacement FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
"6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the replacement FRU
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
14 Closing the rack door
*1 Simultaneous replacement of the CPU memory unit and PSU backplane unit is prohibited. To replace the CPU memory unit and PSU
backplane unit, first replace either of the units and perform the work up to "9. Confirming that there is no problem with the replacement
FRU." Then, return to "5. Enabling access to the FRU requiring maintenance," and replace the other unit.
*2 If a CPU memory unit lower is replaced in the system of the hardware RAID volume in a hardware RAID configuratioｎ using internal
disks, you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume before performing the work in "12. Starting the system." For details, see "14.2.11
Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 145

7.3 FRU Installation Workflow
This section describes the installation workflow for the following FRUs of the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S:
- CPU memory unit upper
- PCI Express card
- Memory
- Internal disk
- SPARC M10-4S chassis (Note)

Note - When installing the SPARC M10-4S chassis for a SPARC M10-4S with a building block
configuration or single-chassis configuration, see "Chapter 9 Installing a System with a
Building Block Configuration" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide.

7.3.1 Active addition

This section describes the workflows for active/hot and active/cold FRU installation.
References to detailed descriptions are written in the workflow. See any of them as
required. You can perform active/cold addition only for a system with a building
block configuration.
Active addition has the following patterns:
■ Active/hot addition (for a PCIe card)
■ Active/hot addition (for an internal disk)
■ Active/cold addition (building block configuration only)

146 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Active/hot addition (for a PCIe card)
Active/hot addition can be performed on a PCIe card. Perform the following
procedure to install the unit.

Figure 7-14 Active/hot addition flow (for a PCIe card)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Lower cable support

4. Install PCIe card

5. Fix cable support

6. Incorporate PCIe card

7. Confirm that there is no problem with

installed FRU

8. Close rack door

Installation complete

Table 7-15 Active/hot addition work procedure (for a PCIe card)

ItemWork procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
the system and the I/O device usage
status
3 Lowering the cable support "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
4 Installing a PCIe card "Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
5 Fixing the cable support "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
6 Incorporating the PCIe card "6.5.2 Incorporating an I/O device" in "Incorporation of a PCI
Express card"
7 Confirming that there is no problem "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
with the installed FRU

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 147

Table 7-15 Active/hot addition work procedure (for a PCIe card) (continued)
ItemWork procedure Reference

8 Closing the rack door

148 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Active/hot addition (for an internal disk)
Active/hot addition can be performed on an internal disk. Perform the following
procedure to install the unit.

Figure 7-15 Active/hot addition flow (for an internal disk)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Install internal disk

4. Check mounting of internal disk

5. Close rack door

Installation complete

Table 7-16 Active/hot addition work procedure (for an internal disk)

Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
the system and the I/O device usage
status
3 Installing an internal disk "Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
4 Checking the mounting of the "6.5.2 Incorporating an I/O device" in "Incorporation of an
internal disk internal disk"
5 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 149

 Active/cold addition (building block configuration only)
Active/cold addition can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a PCI
Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a building block configuration.
Perform the following procedure to install the unit.

Figure 7-16 Active/cold addition flow (building block configuration only)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Check assignment status of PCIe card

4. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

partition

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Mount installation part

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

11. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into partition

12. Confirm that there is no problem with the

replaced FRU

13. Close rack door

Installation complete

150 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-17 Active/cold addition work procedure (building block configuration only)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
3 Releasing the assignment of a PCIe card "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices"
4 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.4.3 Releasing a chassis requiring maintenance from the
from the partition physical partition"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
from the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Mounting the installation part See the installation work procedures for each FRU (Chapters
8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring maintenance "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
maintenance into the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*1)
maintenance "6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.5.1 Incorporating a chassis into a physical partition"
maintenance into a partition
12 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the replacement FRU
13 Closing the rack door
*1 Normally, the testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system
board before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 151

7.3.2 Inactive addition
This section describes the workflows for inactive/hot and inactive/cold FRU
installation. References to detailed descriptions are written in the workflow. See any
of them as required. You can perform inactive addition work only for a system with a
building block configuration.
Inactive addition has the following patterns:
■ Inactive/hot addition (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
■ Inactive/cold addition (building block configuration only)

Inactive/hot addition (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

Inactive/hot addition can be performed on an internal disk and a PCIe card. Perform
the following procedure to install the unit.

152 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 7-17 Inactive/hot addition flow (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Power off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Lower cable support for maintenance on

PCIe card

6. Install target FRU

7. Secure cable support after maintenance

on PCIe card

8. Diagnose installed FRU

9. Confirm that there is no problem with

installed FRU

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

12. Close rack door

Installation complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 153

Table 7-18 Inactive/hot addition work procedure (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance"
maintenance
5 Lowering the cable support for "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
6 Installing the target FRU See the installation procedures for each FRU.
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Securing the cable support after "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
8 Diagnosing the installed FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the installed FRU
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance"
maintenance
12 Closing the rack door

154 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Inactive/cold addition (building block configuration only)
Inactive/cold addition can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a PCI
Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a building block configuration.
Perform the following procedure to install the unit.

Figure 7-18 Inactive/cold addition flow (building block configuration only)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Power off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Mount installation part

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

installed FRU

12. Switch mode switch

13. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

14. Close rack door

Installation complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 155

Table 7-19 Inactive/cold addition work procedure (building block configuration only)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
from the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Mounting the installation part See the installation work procedures for each FRU (Chapters
8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring maintenance "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
maintenance into the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*1)
maintenance
"6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the installed FRU
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
14 Closing the rack door
*1 The testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system board
before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

156 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
7.3.3 System-stopped addition
This section describes the workflows for system-stopped/hot and system-stopped/
cold FRU installation. References to detailed descriptions are written in the
workflow. See any of them as required.
System-stopped addition has the following patterns:
■ System-stopped/hot addition
■ System-stopped/cold addition (for a single-chassis configuration)
■ System-stopped/cold addition (for a building block configuration)

System-stopped/hot addition
System-stopped/hot addition can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a
PCI Express card, memory, and an internal disk. Perform the following procedure to
install the unit.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 157

 Figure 7-19 System-stopped/hot addition flow

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Lower cable support for maintenance on

PCIe card

6. Install target FRU

7. Secure cable support after maintenance on

PCIe card

8. Diagnose installed FRU

9. Confirm that there is no problem with

installed FRU

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Start system

12. Close rack door

Installation complete

158 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-20 System-stopped/hot addition work procedure (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Lowering the cable support for "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
6 Installing the target FRU See the installation procedures for each FRU.
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Securing the cable support after "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
8 Diagnosing the installed FRU "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the installed FRU
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
12 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 159

 System-stopped/cold addition (for a single-chassis configuration)
System-stopped/cold addition can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a
PCI Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a single-chassis configuration.
Perform the following procedure to install the unit.

Figure 7-20 System-stopped/cold addition flow (for a single-chassis configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Enable maintenance of chassis requiring

maintenance

6. Install target FRU

7. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

8. Perform diagnosis test

9. Confirm that there is no problem with

installed FRU

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Start system

12. Close rack door

Installation complete

160 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-21 System-stopped/cold addition work procedure (for a single-chassis configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Enabling maintenance of the "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
chassis requiring maintenance
6 Installing the target FRU See the installation procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Restoring the chassis requiring "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
maintenance
8 Performing a diagnosis test "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the installed FRU
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
12 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 161

 System-stopped/cold addition (for a building block configuration)
System-stopped/cold addition can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a
PCI Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a building block configuration.
Perform the following procedure to install the unit.

Figure 7-21 System-stopped/cold addition flow (for a building block configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Remove chassis requiring maintenance

7. Install target FRU

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Perform diagnosis test

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

installed FRU

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Start system

14. Close rack door

Installation complete

162 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-22 System-stopped/cold addition work procedure (for a building block configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a
maintenance from the system system with a building block configuration)"
6 Removing the chassis requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Installing the target FRU See the installation procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
maintenance
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in
maintenance into the system a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Performing a diagnosis test "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*1)
"6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the installed FRU
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
14 Closing the rack door
*1 The testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system board
before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

7.4 FRU Removal Workflow

This section describes the removal workflow for the following FRUs of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S:
- CPU memory unit upper
- PCI Express card
- Memory
- Internal disk

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 163

 - SPARC M10-4S chassis (Note)

Note - When removing the SPARC M10-4S chassis from a building block configuration, see
"Chapter 10 Removing a System with a Building Block Configuration" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide.

7.4.1 Active removal

This section describes the workflows for active/hot and active/cold FRU removal.
References to detailed descriptions are written in the workflow. See any of them as
required. You can perform active/cold removal only for a system with a building
block configuration.
Active removal has the following patterns:
■ Active/hot removal (for a PCIe card)
■ Active/hot removal (for an internal disk)
■ Active/cold removal (building block configuration only)

Active/hot removal (for a PCIe card)

Active/hot removal can be performed on a PCIe card. Perform the following
procedure to remove the unit.

164 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 7-22 Active/hot removal flow (for a PCIe card)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Release assignment of PCIe card

4. Enable removal of a PCIe card for removal

5. Lower cable support

6. Remove PCIe card for removal

7. Fix cable support

8. Confirm that there is no problem with chassis

after removal

9. Close rack door

Removal complete

Table 7-23 Active/hot removal work procedure (for a PCIe card)

Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
the system and the I/O device usage
status
3 Releasing the assignment of a PCIe "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices"
card
4 Enabling the removal of a PCIe card "5.4.2 Enabling the removal of an I/O device" in "Enabling the
for removal removal of a PCI Express card"
5 Lowering the cable support "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
6 Removing the PCIe card for removal "Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
7 Fixing the cable support "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
8 Confirming that there is no problem "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
with the chassis after the removal
9 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 165

 Active/hot removal (for an internal disk)
Active/hot removal can be performed on an internal disk. Perform the following
procedure to remove the unit.

Figure 7-23 Active/hot removing flow (for an internal disk)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Enable removal of internal disk

4. Remove internal disk for removal

5. Confirm that there is no problem with chassis

after removal

6. Close rack door

Removal complete

Table 7-24 Active/hot removal work procedure (for an internal disk)

Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
the system and the I/O device usage
status
3 Enabling the removal of an internal "5.4.2 Enabling the removal of an I/O device" in "Enabling the
disk removal of an internal disk"
4 Removing an internal disk for removal "Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
5 Confirming that there is no problem "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
with the chassis after the removal
6 Closing the rack door

Note - You can perform the active/hot removal work for an internal disk only in a RAID
configuration.

166 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Active/cold removal (building block configuration only)
Active/cold removal can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a PCI
Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a building block configuration.
Perform the following procedure to remove the unit.

Figure 7-24 Active/cold removal flow (building block configuration only)

1. Open rack door

2. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

3. Release assignment of PCIe card

4. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

partition

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance from

system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Remove FRU for removal

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

11. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into partition

12. Confirm that there is no problem with

chassis after removal

13. Close rack door

Removal complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 167

Table 7-25 Active/cold removal work procedure (building block configuration only)
Pro Task Reference
ced
ure

1 Opening the rack door

2 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
3 Releasing the assignment of a PCIe card "5.4.1 Releasing the assignment of I/O devices"
4 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.4.3 Releasing a chassis requiring maintenance from the
from the partition physical partition"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
from the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Removing an FRU for removal See the removal procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring maintenance "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
maintenance into the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*1)
maintenance "6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.5.1 Incorporating a chassis into a physical partition"
maintenance into a partition
12 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the chassis after the removal
13 Closing the rack door
*1 Normally, the testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system
board before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

168 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
7.4.2 Inactive removal
This section describes the workflows for inactive/hot and inactive/cold FRU removal.
References to detailed descriptions are written in the workflow. See any of them as
required. You can perform inactive removal work only for a system with a building
block configuration.
Inactive removal has the following patterns:
■ Inactive/hot removal (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
■ Inactive/cold removal

Inactive/hot removal (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

Inactive/hot removal can be performed on an internal disk and a PCIe card. Perform
the following procedure to remove the unit.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 169

 Figure 7-25 Inactive/hot removal flow (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Power off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Lower cable support for maintenance on

PCIe card

6. Remove target FRU

7. Secure cable support after maintenance

on PCIe card

8. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

9. Confirm that there is no problem with chassis

after removal

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

12. Close rack door

Removal complete

170 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-26 Inactive/hot removal work procedure (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance"
maintenance
5 Lowering the cable support for "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
6 Removing the target FRU See the removal procedure for each FRU
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Securing the cable support after "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
8 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
maintenance
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the chassis after the
removal
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance"
maintenance
12 Closing the rack door

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 171

 Inactive/cold removal
Inactive/cold removal can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a PCI
Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a building block configuration.
Perform the following procedure to remove the unit.

Figure 7-26 Inactive/cold removal flow

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Power off chassis requiring maintenance

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance

from system

6. Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance

7. Remove target FRU

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

chassis after removal

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Power on chassis requiring maintenance

14. Close rack door

Removal complete

172 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 7-27 Inactive/cold removal work procedure (building block configuration only)
Pro Task Reference
ced
ure

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition of the "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource
system and the I/O device usage status Usage Status"
4 Powering off the chassis requiring "5.5 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring maintenance "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
from the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
6 Enabling access to the FRU requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Removing the target FRU See the removal procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring maintenance "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible
maintenance into the system only in a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*1)
maintenance
"6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Confirming that there is no problem with "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
the chassis after the removal
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Powering on the chassis requiring "6.7 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring
maintenance Maintenance"
14 Closing the rack door
*1 The testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system board
before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 173

7.4.3 System-stopped removal
This section describes the workflows for system-stopped/hot and system-stopped/
cold FRU removal. References to detailed descriptions are written in the workflow.
See any of them as required.
System-stopped removal has the following patterns:
■ System-stopped/hot removal (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
■ System-stopped/cold removal (for a single-chassis configuration)
■ System-stopped/cold removal (for a building block configuration)

System-stopped/hot removal (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

System-stopped/hot removal can be performed on an internal disk and a PCIe card.
Perform the following procedure to remove the unit.

174 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 7-27 System-stopped/hot removal flow (for an internal disk or PCIe card)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Lower cable support for maintenance on

PCIe card

6. Remove target FRU

7. Secure cable support after maintenance on

PCIe card

8. Diagnose chassis requiring maintenance

9. Confirm that there is no problem with chassis

after removal

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Start system

12. Close rack door

Removal complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 175

Table 7-28 System-stopped/hot removal work procedure (for an internal disk or PCIe card)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Lowering the cable support for "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
6 Removing the target FRU See the removal procedure for each FRU
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Securing the cable support after "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support"
maintenance on a PCIe card
8 Diagnosing the chassis requiring "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
maintenance
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the chassis after the
removal
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
12 Closing the rack door

176 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
System-stopped/cold removal (for a single-chassis configuration)
System-stopped/cold removal can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a
PCI Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a single-chassis configuration.
Perform the following procedure to remove the unit.

Figure 7-28 System-stopped/cold removal flow (for a single-chassis configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Enable maintenance of chassis requiring

maintenance

6. Remove target FRU

7. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

8. Perform diagnosis test

9. Confirm that there is no problem with

chassis after removal

10. Return mode switch to original mode

11. Start system

12. Close rack door

Removal complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 177

Table 7-29 System-stopped/cold removal work procedure (for a single-chassis configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Enabling maintenance of the "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
chassis requiring maintenance
6 Removing the target FRU See the removal procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
7 Restoring the chassis requiring "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
maintenance
8 Performing a diagnosis test "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board"
9 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the chassis after the
removal
10 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
11 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
12 Closing the rack door

178 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
System-stopped/cold removal (for a building block configuration)
System-stopped/cold removal can be performed on the CPU memory unit upper, a
PCI Express card, memory, and an internal disk in a building block configuration.
Perform the following procedure to remove the unit.

Figure 7-29 System-stopped/cold removal flow (for a building block configuration)

1. Open rack door

2. Switch mode switch

3. Check operating condition of system and

I/O device usage status

4. Stop system

5. Release chassis requiring maintenance

from system

6. Remove chassis requiring maintenance

7. Remove target FRU

8. Restore chassis requiring maintenance

9. Incorporate chassis requiring maintenance

into system

10. Perform diagnosis test

11. Confirm that there is no problem with

chassis after removal

12. Return mode switch to original mode

13. Start system

14. Close rack door

Removal complete

Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow 179

Table 7-30 System-stopped/cold removal work procedure (for a building block configuration)
Item Work procedure Reference

1 Opening the rack door

2 Switching the mode switch on the "5.2 Switching the Mode Switch to Service Mode"
operation panel to Service mode
3 Checking the operating condition "5.3 Checking the Operating Condition and Resource Usage Status"
of the system and the I/O device
usage status
4 Stopping the system "5.6 Stopping the Entire System"
5 Releasing the chassis requiring "5.8.1 Releasing of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in a
maintenance from the system system with a building block configuration)"
6 Removing the chassis requiring "5.9 Accessing an FRU"
maintenance
7 Removing the target FRU See the removal procedures for each FRU (Chapters 8 to 10).
"Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards"
"Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory"
"Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks"
8 Restoring the chassis requiring "6.1 Restoring the Chassis"
maintenance
9 Incorporating the chassis requiring "6.2.1 Incorporation of the SPARC M10-4S chassis (possible only in
maintenance into the system a system with a building block configuration)"
10 Performing a diagnosis test "6.3.1 Diagnosing the system board" (*1)
"6.3.2 Diagnosing the crossbar unit and crossbar cables"
11 Confirming that there is no "6.3.3 Checking the FRU Status after Maintenance"
problem with the chassis after the
removal
12 Returning the mode switch on the "6.6 Returning the Mode Switch to Locked Mode"
operation panel to Locked mode
13 Starting the system "6.8 Starting the Entire System"
14 Closing the rack door
*1 The testsb command is executed during replacefru command processing. However, if that is canceled, diagnose the system board
before incorporating the chassis requiring maintenance into the physical partition.

180 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 8

Maintaining the PCI Express Cards

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining a PCI Express (PCIe) card
mounted in a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. A PCIe card can be replaced, expanded, and
reduced.
■ Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card
■ PCI Express Card Configuration
■ FRU Removal and Installation Flow
■ Removing a PCI Express Card
■ Installing a PCI Express Card

8.1 Before Maintaining a PCI Express

Card
This chapter only has descriptions of the PCI Express card configuration and the
work of removing and installing PCI Express cards.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on PCI Express cards, also see "PCI Express card" in
"Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types by FRU."

8.2 PCI Express Card Configuration

This section describes the configuration and location of the PCIe cards.
Up to eight PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4S with a crossbar unit. Up
to 11 PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4 without a crossbar unit.

181
 Figure 8-1 Location of the PCIe card

(1) (2)
(3)(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)

Location Component
number

1 PCIe card (PCI#0)

2 PCIe card (PCI#1)
3 PCIe card (PCI#2)
4 PCIe card (PCI#3)
5 PCIe card (PCI#4)
6 PCIe card (PCI#5)
7 PCIe card (PCI#6)
8 PCIe card (PCI#7)
9 PCIe card (PCI#8) (*1)
10 PCIe card (PCI#9) (*1)
11 PCIe card (PCI#10) (*1)
*1 Can be mounted only on a SPARC M10-4.

182 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
8.3 FRU Removal and Installation Flow
Perform maintenance work on PCI Express cards by following the procedures
shown in Figure 8-2, Table 8-1, Table 8-2, and Table 8-3.

Figure 8-2 Maintenance workflow

Replacement Installation Removal

1. Remove PCI Express 1. Remove PCI Express 1. Remove PCI Express

card cassette card cassette card cassette

2. Remove PCI Express 2. Remove PCIe card

2. Install PCIe card filler
card filler

3. Install PCI Express 3. Install PCI Express 3. Install PCI Express

card card card cassette

4. Install PCI Express

(Go to "7.3 FRU Installation (Go to "7.4 FRU Removal
card cassette
Workflow") Workflow")

(Go to "7.2 FRU Replacement

Workflow")

Table 8-1 Replacement workflow and procedures

Item Replacement work procedure Reference

1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette "8.4.1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette"
2 Removing a PCI express card "8.4.2 Removing a PCI Express card"
3 Installing a PCI express card "8.5.1 Installing a PCI Express card"
4 Installing a PCI Express card cassette "8.5.3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette"

Table 8-2 Installation workflow and procedures

Item Installation work procedure Reference

1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette "8.4.1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette"
2 Removing a PCI Express card filler "8.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card filler"
3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette "8.5.3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette"

Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 183

Table 8-3 Removal workflow and procedures
Item Replacement work procedure Reference

1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette "8.4.1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette"
2 Installing a PCI Express card filler "8.4.3 Installing a PCI Express card filler"
3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette "8.5.3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette"

8.4 Removing a PCI Express Card

This section describes the procedure for removing a PCIe card. Enable removal of the
PCIe card before attempting to remove it. For details, follow the procedure in
"Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

8.4.1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette

There are two types of PCIe card cassette. The shapes of the latch (A in the figure)
and lever (B in the figure) vary depending on the type of the PCIe card cassette, but
the same removal procedure applies. For the types of PCIe card cassettes, see "."
Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use Type-1.

Figure 8-3 Types of PCIe card cassettes

Type-1 Type-2

A
A

B
B

184 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
1. If the crossbar cables are fixed to the cable support with the hook-and-loop
fastener, remove the hook-and-loop fastener.
2. Remove the cables connected to the PCIe card cassette requiring maintenance.

Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.

3. Lower the lever (B in the figure) of the PCIe card cassette while pushing the
latch (A in the figure).

Figure 8-4 Lever of PCIe card cassette

A B

4. Hold the lever and carefully pull the PCIe card cassette out of the PCI slot to
remove it.

Note - Place the removed PCIe card cassette on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 185

 Figure 8-5 Removing the PCIe card cassette

8.4.2 Removing a PCI Express card

1. Remove the cover by lifting it up while pushing the clip (A in the figure) of the
cover inwards.

Figure 8-6 Clip at rear of cover

2. Remove the screw securing the PCIe card cassette.

186 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 8-7 Removing the screw

3. Remove the bracket (A in the figure) from the PCIe card.

Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 187

 Figure 8-8 Removing the bracket

4. Remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette.

Note - Do not forcibly remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. If excessive force is
used to remove the PCIe card, it may be damaged.
Note - Place the removed PCIe card on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

188 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 8-9 Removing a PCIe card

8.4.3 Installing a PCI Express card filler

1. Mount the PCIe card filler on the outside (A in the figure) of the PCIe card
cassette.

Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 189

 Figure 8-10 Installing the PCIe card filler

2. Fix the installed PCIe card filler.

190 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 8-11 Fixing the PCIe card filler

8.5 Installing a PCI Express Card

This section describes the procedure for installing a PCIe card.

8.5.1 Installing a PCI Express card

1. Install the PCIe card by inserting it into the connector of the PCIe card cassette.

Note - Confirm that the tab of the PCIe card or the tab (A in the figure) of the filler for the
PCIe card is inserted in the notch (B in the figure) of the PCIe card cassette.

Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 191

 Figure 8-12 Installing a PCIe card

2. Install the bracket for the PCIe card, and secure it with the one screw.

Figure 8-13 Installing the bracket

192 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 3. Mount the cover on the PCIe card cassette.

8.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card filler

1. Remove the PCIe card filler (A in the figure) from the PCIe card cassette.

Figure 8-14 Removing the PCIe filler

8.5.3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette

Caution - When installing a PCIe card cassette, confirm that the connectors on both
the chassis and PCIe card cassette do not have any bent pins, and that the pins are
aligned correctly. If you attempt to install a PCIe card cassette while any of the
connector pins are bent, the chassis or the PCIe card cassette may be damaged. When
performing installation, perform the work carefully so as not to bend any pins.

1. Hold the lever of the PCIe card cassette and carefully insert the cassette into
the PC slot.

Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 193

 Note - Before installing the PCIe card cassette, confirm that the lever of the PCIe card cassette
is lowered.
Note - Slide the PCIe card cassette along the rail at the bottom of the PCIe slot.
Note - Do not forcibly push the PCIe card cassette into the PCIe slot. Using excessive force
may damage the component or the chassis.

2. Raise the lever of the PCIe card cassette while pushing the latch and secure
it.

Note - Ensure that the PCIe card cassette is firmly inserted and secured.

3. Connect the cables to the PCIe card cassette.

Note - Reinstall the cables of the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to
notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

continue maintenance work.

194 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 9

Maintaining the CPU Memory

Unit/Memory

This chapter describes the procedures for maintaining the CPU memory unit and
memory mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. The CPU memory unit lower can
only be replaced. The CPU memory unit upper can be replaced, expanded, and
reduced.
■ Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit/Memory
■ Configuration of the CPU Memory Unit and Memory
■ Maintenance Precautions
■ FRU Removal and Installation Flow
■ Removing a CPU Memory Unit
■ Installing a PCI Express Cable
■ Switching the microSD Card
■ Removing Memory
■ Installing Memory
■ Installing a CPU Memory Unit

9.1 Before Maintaining a CPU Memory

Unit/Memory
This chapter only has descriptions of the CPU memory unit/memory configuration
and the work of removing and installing a CPU memory unit/memory.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on a CPU memory unit/memory, also see "CPU
memory unit" and "Memory" in "Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types by
FRU."

195
9.2 Configuration of the CPU Memory Unit
and Memory
This section describes the configuration and locations of the CPU memory unit and
memory.

9.2.1 Configuration of the CPU Memory Unit

A CPU memory unit is composed of the following two parts: the CPU memory unit
lower and the CPU memory unit upper.

Figure 9-1 Location of CPU memory unit

(1)

(2)

Location number Component

1 CPU memory unit upper (CMUU)

2 CPU memory unit lower (CMUL)

There are two types of CPU memory units: FRAME-A and FRAME-B. The type of a
CPU memory unit can be determined from the indication on the label (A in the
figure). If a CPU memory unit does not have the "FRAME-B" indication, it is a
FRAME-A unit.

196 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Note - FRAME-A and FRAME-B cannot be installed if they are mixed because they are not
compatible with each other. Especially when performing replacement work, be careful not to
mix the top cover and left- and right-side guides of the replacement CPU memory unit with
those of the CPU memory unit being replaced.

Figure 9-2 Type of CPU memory unit

9.2.2 Memory Configuration

A maximum of 32 memory modules can be implemented in one CPU memory unit.
One chassis can contain two CPU memory units; the CPU memory unit upper and
lower. Therefore, the maximum number of memory modules that can be implemented
in one chassis is 64.
For the memory installation rules and the method for checking memory information,
see "2.2 Checking the Memory Configuration Rules."

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 197

9.3 Maintenance Precautions
Note the following points when you maintain the CPU memory unit:
■ The weight of the CPU memory unit is 17 kg (37.4 lb). Maintenance must be done
by two people if the CPU memory unit is mounted at the 24 or higher U of the
rack. If you attempt to perform the maintenance work alone, you may injure
yourself or cause damage to the chassis.
■ Do not replace the CPU memory unit lower at the same time as the PSU backplane
unit. If you replace them at the same time, the system may fail to operate normally.
■ The XSCF mounted in the CPU memory unit lower is not a FRU (field replaceable
unit). When replacing the CPU memory unit lower, do not switch the XSCF units.
■ If you switch the microSD card when replacing the CPU memory unit lower, the
maintenance time is shorter since the XSCF setting information is inherited.
■ If the device uses the hardware RAID function, after replacing the CPU memory
unit lower, you need to reactivate the hardware RAID volume. For details, see
"14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
■ When installing the CPU memory unit upper, you need to perform the work of
adding PCIe cables. For details, see "9.6 Installing a PCI Express Cable."
■ When you install/remove the CPU memory unit upper, the root complex is also
installed/removed. As a result, the PCIe card installation rules, etc. may change
and the logical domains may need to be reconfigured. For details, see "4.3.2
Precautions for installation" or "4.3.3 Precautions for reduction."

9.4 FRU Removal and Installation Flow

Perform maintenance work on the CPU memory unit by following the procedures
shown in Figure 9-3 and Table 9-1.
Perform maintenance work on memory by following the procedures shown in Figure
9-4 and Table 9-4.

198 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Maintenance workflow of the CPU memory unit

Figure 9-3 Maintenance workflow of the CPU memory unit

(Enable access to FRU requiring maintenance)

1. Access CPU memory

unit

2. Remove CPU memory

unit from chassis

3. Remove CPU memory

unit upper
4. Replacement 4. Removal

4. Installation

4. Remove CPU memory 4. Removing a filler unit 4. Remove CPU memory

unit upper or filler unit unit upper

5. Installing a PCI Express

5. Switch micro SD card (*1) cable 5. Install filler unit

6. Remove memory 6. Install memory 6. Install CPU memory

unit in chassis

7. Install memory 7. Install CPU memory

unit upper (Go to "7.4 FRU Removal
Workflow")

8. Install CPU memory unit 8. Install CPU memory

upper or filler unit unit in chassis

9. Install CPU memory unit (Go to "7.3 FRU Installation

in chassis
Workflow")

(Go to "7.2 FRU Replacement

Workflow")

*1: Perform this work only when replacing CPU memory unit lower.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 199

Table 9-1 CPU memory unit replacement workflow and procedures
Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing the CPU memory unit "9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit"
2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the "9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis"
chassis
3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper "9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper"
4 Switching the microSD card "9.7 Switching the microSD Card" (*1)
5 Removing memory "9.8 Removing Memory"
6 Installing memory "9.9 Installing Memory" (*2)
7 Installing the CPU memory unit upper "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper"
8 Installing the CPU memory unit in the "9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis"
chassis
*1 You can shorten the maintenance time by switching the microSD card when replacing the CPU memory unit lower. You do not need to
switch the microSD card when replacing the CPU memory unit upper.
*2 When replacing the CPU memory unit, mount memory in the same mounting locations as in the replaced unit.

Table 9-2 CPU memory unit upper installation workflow and procedures
Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing the CPU memory unit "9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit"
2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the "9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis"
chassis
3 Installing a PCI Express cable "9.6 Installing a PCI Express Cable" (*1)
4 Installing memory "9.9 Installing Memory"
5 Installing the CPU memory unit upper "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper"
6 Installing the CPU memory unit in the "9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis"
chassis
*1 If the PCI Express cables have been installed, skip this procedure.

Table 9-3 CPU memory unit upper removal workflow and procedures
Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing the CPU memory unit "9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit"
2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the "9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis"
chassis
3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper "9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper"
4 Removing memory "9.8 Removing Memory"
5 Installing the CPU memory unit in the "9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis"
chassis

200 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Maintenance workflow of memory

Figure 9-4 Maintenance workflow of memory

(Enable removal of chassis requiring maintenance)

1. Access CPU memory

unit

2. Remove CPU memory

unit from chassis

3. Removing CPU memory unit upper or

filler unit when target memory is in
CPU memory unit lower
4. Replacement 4. Removal

4. Installation

4. Remove memory 4. Install memory 4. Install memory

5. Install memory 5. Install removed CPU 5. Install removed CPU

memory unit upper or memory unit upper or
filler unit filler unit
6. Install removed CPU
memory unit upper or
6. Install CPU memory 6. Install CPU memory
filler unit
unit in chassis unit in chassis

7. Install CPU memory unit

in chassis (Go to "7.3 FRU Installation (Go to "7.4 FRU Removal
Workflow") Workflow")

(Go to "7.2 FRU Replacement

Workflow")

Table 9-4 Memory replacement workflow and procedures

Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing the CPU memory unit "9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit"
2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the "9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis"
chassis
3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper "9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper"
when the target memory is in the CPU
memory unit lower.
4 Removing memory "9.8 Removing Memory"
5 Installing memory "9.9 Installing Memory"
6 Installing the removed CPU memory unit "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper"
upper
7 Installing the CPU memory unit in the "9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis"
chassis

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 201

Table 9-5 Memory installation workflow and procedures
Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing the CPU memory unit "9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit"
2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the "9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis"
chassis
3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper "9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper"
when the target memory is in the CPU
memory unit lower.
4 Installing memory "9.9 Installing Memory"
5 Installing the removed CPU memory unit "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper"
upper
6 Installing the CPU memory unit in the "9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis"
chassis

Table 9-6 Memory removal workflow and procedures

Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing the CPU memory unit "9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit"
2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the "9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis"
chassis
3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper "9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper"
when the target memory is in the CPU
memory unit lower.
4 Removing memory "9.8 Removing Memory"
5 Installing the removed CPU memory unit "9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper"
upper
6 Installing the CPU memory unit in the "9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis"
chassis

9.5 Removing a CPU Memory Unit

This section describes the procedure for removing a CPU memory unit. Enable the
removal of the CPU memory unit before attempting to remove it. For details, follow
the procedure in "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."
Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use the SPARC
M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit.

202 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit

1. Remove the crossbar cables from the cable support.
For details, see "5.9.1 Removing the crossbar cables from the cable support."
2. Lower the cable support.
For details, see "5.9.2 Lowering the cable support."
3. Remove all the cables connected to the external interface on the rear of the
chassis.
The cables to be removed are as follows.
■ Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card
■ Crossbar cables (They may have been removed in step 1.)
■ XSCF BB control cable
■ XSCF DUAL control cable
■ XSCF-LAN cable
■ Serial cable
■ LAN cable
■ SAS cable
■ USB cable

Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.

4. Remove all the PCIe card cassettes.

For details, see "8.4.1 Removing a PCI Express card cassette."

Note - Make a note of the locations of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure
that they are reinstalled correctly.

5. If any crossbar units are mounted, remove them.

For details, see "15.3 Removing a Crossbar Unit."
6. Loosen the three screws holding the mounting frame and then remove it.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 203

 Figure 9-5 Screws securing the mounting frame

9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis

This section describes the procedure for removing a CPU memory unit.

Note - To install or remove a CPU memory unit upper, it is necessary to remove the CPU
memory unit from the chassis.

1. Loosen the one screw securing the lever of the CPU memory unit (rear left
side) and then lower the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit to the
horizontal position.

Figure 9-6 Locations of the screw and the levers of the CPU memory unit

204 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 2. Hold the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit and pull out the CPU
memory unit about 10 cm (3.9 in.)

Figure 9-7 Pulling out the CPU memory unit

3. With a hold on the Handling Position on both sides of the CPU memory unit,
remove the CPU memory unit.

9.5.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper

Remove the CPU memory unit upper after removing the CPU memory unit from the
chassis. Perform reduction using the same procedure. For installation or for a system
where the CPU memory unit upper is not mounted, remove the filler unit of the CPU
memory unit upper.
1. Unlock (push) the top cover of the CPU memory unit and remove the cover by
sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 205

 Figure 9-8 Releasing the lock

2. Unlock (push) the right-side guide (when viewed from the rear) and remove it
by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 9-9 Removing right-side guide

3. Unlock (push) the left-side guide (when viewed from the rear) and remove it

206 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 9-10 Removing left-side guide

4. Remove the two PCIe cables (A in the figure) on the right side that connect
the CPU memory units upper and lower, from the CPU memory unit upper.
Then, push them toward the outside of the chassis.
When removing the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper, you do not need
to remove the PCIe cables. Proceed to step 10.

Figure 9-11 Removing the right-side PCIe cables

5. Remove the two PCIe cables (A in the figure) on the left side that connect the
CPU memory units upper and lower, from the CPU memory unit upper. Then,

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 207

 push the longer one on the front side toward the outside of the chassis.

Figure 9-12 Removing the left-side cables

6. Of the two PCIe cables on the left side, also remove the rear one from the CPU
memory unit lower, as it is short.

208 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-13 Removing the PCIe cable from the left side rear

Perform the following work from the rear side of the chassis. Figure 9-14 shows the
standing position (A in the figure) of a field engineer.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 209

 Figure 9-14 Standing position of a field engineer

210 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
7. Raise the levers (A in the figure) on the right and left sides to release the CPU
memory unit upper.

Figure 9-15 Positions of right and left levers

8. While holding the levers, slightly lift the CPU memory unit upper.
9. If PCIe cables are connected to the CPU memory unit lower that has a filler
unit mounted, push the PCIe cables (A and B in the figure) toward the outside
of the chassis.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 211

 Figure 9-16 How to push PCIe cables toward the outside

10. With a hold on the Handling Position on both sides of the CMUU, lift the CPU
memory unit upper or filler unit, and then remove it carefully.

Note - Be careful when removing the CPU memory unit upper or the filler unit so that it does
not catch on any PCIe cable.
Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit upper on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

212 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 9-17 Removing CPU memory unit upper

9.6 Installing a PCI Express Cable

Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To
determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 9-2.

Connect the CPU memory unit lower and CPU memory unit upper with a PCIe
cable.
Before installing a CPU memory unit upper, confirm that PCIe cables are connected
to the CPU memory unit lower.
If PCIe cables have not been connected to the CPU memory unit lower, remove the
CPU memory unit board (lower) once, and connect PCIe cables.
If PCIe cables are connected to the CPU memory unit lower, this work is not required.

Note - If PCIe cables have not been connected to the CPU memory unit lower when you are
installing a CPU memory unit upper, use the PCIe cables supplied with the CPU memory
unit upper.

1. Remove the eight screws at both ends of the XSCF cable connection port on
the rear of the CPU memory unit lower.
Use a flathead screwdriver (small) to remove them.
For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, this step is not necessary.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 213

 Figure 9-18 Screws for both ends of the XSCF cable connection ports (for the
SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

2. Loosen the two screws holding the upper rear side of the CPU memory unit
lower. Then, remove the rear cover (A in the figure) by pulling it in the
direction of the arrow.

214 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-19 Removing the rear cover

3. Remove and pull out the XSCF board.

- For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A/FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Remove the three screws securing the XSCF board (A in the figure) and rear
cover. Tilt the right lever of the XSCF mount with your fingers by about 5 mm
(0.2 in.) to the right (B in the figure). Lift the right side of the XSCF board to
release the connection of the connector (C in the figure).

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 215

 Figure 9-20 Releasing a connected XSCF board (for SPARC M10-4 with a
FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A/FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Remove the four screws securing the XSCF board (A in the figure). Then, lift
the right side of the XSCF board to release the connection of the connector.

216 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-21 Releasing a connected XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a
FRAME-A/FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

4. Pull out the XSCF board diagonally to the right (arrow).

Note - Place the removed XSCF board on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

Figure 9-22 Pulling out an XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A/
FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 217

 Figure 9-23 Pulling out an XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A/
FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

5. Remove the screw fixing the XSCF mount.

- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Remove the one screw securing the XSCF mount (A in the figure).

218 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-24 Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A/
FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 219

 Figure 9-25 Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)

- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Remove the two screws securing the XSCF mount (A in the figure).

220 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-26 Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)

6. Remove the XSCF mount.

- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Lift the protruding left lever (B in the figure) of the XSCF mount (A in the
figure) by about 2 mm (0.1 in.) with your fingers, and slide it about 8 mm (0.4
in.) toward the front (C in the figure). Then, pull it upward to remove it (D in
the figure).

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 221

 Figure 9-27 Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)

B A

222 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-28 Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)

A
B

- For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Slide the right side of the XSCF mount (A in the figure) by about 8 mm (0.4 in.)
toward the front (B in the figure). Then, pull it upward to remove it (C in the
figure).

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 223

 Figure 9-29 Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)

A C

- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Pull the XSCF mount upward (A in the figure) to remove it (B in the figure).

Figure 9-30 Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)

A B

7. Remove the screw fixing the CPU memory unit board.

224 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Remove the one black screw (A in the figure) securing the center part of the
radiator on the front and the four screws securing the CPU memory unit board
(B in the figure).

Figure 9-31 Screws on the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-
4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Remove the one black screw (A in the figure) securing the center part of the
radiator on the front and the six screws securing the CPU memory unit board
(B in the figure).

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 225

 Figure 9-32 Screws on the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-
4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

8. Place your thumb on the frame located at the center of the right and left sides
of the CPU memory unit board (A in the figure) and insert your fingers under
the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure) from the side of the connector
unit.

Note - Be careful not to touch or catch your clothes or wrist strap on a connector pin located
on the back of the CPU memory unit board.
Note - Hard objects such as a machine tools should not come in contact with the connector
located on the back side of the CPU memory unit board.

226 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-33 Finger position when releasing the connection of the connector (surface)

A A

Left Right

Figure 9-34 Finger position when releasing the connection of the connector (back)

B B

Right Left

9. Supporting the frame with your thumb (A in the figure), disconnect the
connection of the connector by pushing up the left and right sides at the
same time with the fingers that are inserted under the CPU memory unit board

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 227

 (B in the figure).

Figure 9-35 How to disconnect the connection of the connector

A
A
B
B

10. Place your thumb on the connector unit located at the center of the right and
left sides of the CPU memory unit board (A in the figure) and hold the board
by inserting your fingers under the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure)
from the side of the connector unit.

Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit board on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

228 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-36 Finger position when holding the board (surface)

A A

Left Right

Figure 9-37 Finger position when holding the board (back)

B B

Right Left

11. Lift the CPU memory unit board in the horizontal position and remove it from
the frame.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 229

 Figure 9-38 Removing the CPU memory unit board

12. Remove the sheet (A in the figure).

You can expand the CPU memory unit upper by performing the above
procedure. You do not have to perform step 13.

230 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-39 Removing the sheet

13. Remove the three PCIe cables.

The direction in which the PCIe cables are removed varies depending on the
type of the CPU memory unit.

Note - Do not attempt to remove a PCIe cable in the wrong direction. If excessive force is
used to remove a PCIe cable, it may be damaged.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 231

 - The connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU
memory unit

Figure 9-40 Removing the PCIe cables (with the connectors for the three PCIe
cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit)

232 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
- The connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside of the CPU memory unit
and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit

Figure 9-41 Removing the PCIe cables (with the connector for one PCIe cable
facing the outside and the other two facing the front of the CPU
memory unit)

14. Install the PCIe cables on the PCIBP board.

Connect the three PCIe cables by matching the PCle cable position labels with
the corresponding position marks on the PCIBP board (A in the figure).
The direction in which the PCIe cables are installed varies depending on the type
of the CPU memory unit.

Note - Do not attempt to install a PCIe cable in the wrong direction. If excessive force is used
to install a PCIe cable, it may be damaged.
Note - Ensure that the PCIe cables are firmly connected and secure.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 233

 - The connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU
memory unit

Figure 9-42 Installing the PCIe cables (with the connectors for the three PCIe
cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit)

234 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 - The connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside of the CPU memory
unit and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit

Figure 9-43 Installing the PCIe cables (with the connector for one PCIe cable
facing the outside and the two facing the front of the CPU memory
unit)

15. Install the sheet (A in the figure).

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 235

 Figure 9-44 Installing sheet

16. Install the CPU memory unit board and secure it to the frame with screws.
Hold the connector unit at the center of the CPU memory unit board and install
it on the frame in the horizontal position.
For how to hold the CPU memory unit board, see Figure 9-45 and Figure 9-46.

Note - Do not tilt the CPU memory unit board when installing it. The board may be damaged
by hitting the back side of the board against a protruding part or the frame guide.

236 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-45 Correct position of the CPU memory unit board

OK
Installing the
board horizontally

Figure 9-46 Wrong position of the CPU memory unit board

NO
Installing the
board tilted

- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit

Install the board so that the bent tip of the frame (C in the figure) can be
inserted into the space (B in the figure) between the end face on the far side of
the CPU memory unit board and the radiator (A in the figure).
a. Insert the board carefully into the frame, keeping it horizontal.
b. If the threaded hole of the board and the threaded hole of the frame (D in
the figure) do not match when you are inserting the board, place the board

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 237

 by adjusting the position of the board so that the outer circumference of the
threaded hole of the frame can be seen (E in the figure).
c. Attach the connector by pressing down the connector units (F and G in the
figure) located at the center of the right and left sides of the board at the
same time.

Figure 9-47 Installing the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

A
C

F G

D E

- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Install the CPU memory unit board, with the left and right guides (A and B in
the figure) and the left guide on the board (C in the figure) as guides.
a. Insert the board carefully into the frame, keeping it horizontal.
b. Attach the connector by pressing down the connector units (D and E in the

238 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 figure) located at the center of the right and left sides of the board at the
same time.

Figure 9-48 Installing the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

A B

D E

17. Fix the CPU memory unit board with screws.

- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 239

 Secure the CPU memory unit board with four screws and the center part of the
radiator on the front with one black screw.
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Secure the CPU memory unit board with six screws.
18. Install the XSCF mount and fix it with screws.
- For the SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Insert the left side (A in the figure) of the XSCF mount into the opening (B in
the figure) of the frame of the CPU memory unit lower. Next, insert the two
guides (C in the figure) on the right side of the mount into the openings (D in
the figure) of the frame. Then, install the XSCF mount by sliding it to the front
(E in the figure) and fixing it with one screw.

Note - After sliding the XSCF mount to the front, confirm that the mount at part F in the
figure is engaged with the frame guide.

Figure 9-49 Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a
FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

A
B

F
D
E

- For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Insert the left protruding part (A in the figure) of the XSCF mount diagonally
from above (C in the figure) into the opening (B in the figure) of the frame of
the CPU memory unit lower. Next, insert the right protruding part (D in the
figure) of the mount from above (F in the figure) into the opening (E in the
figure) of the frame. Then, slide the XSCF mount to the front (G in the figure)
and fix it with one screw (H in the figure).

240 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-50 Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)

A
B

C
F
G

D
E

- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Insert the left protruding part (A in the figure) of the XSCF mount from above
into the opening (B in the figure) of the frame of the CPU memory unit lower.
Then, secure it with two screws (C in the figure).

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 241

 Figure 9-51 Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)

A C

19. Install the XSCF board.

- For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A/FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Insert the XSCF board into guides at two locations (A in the figure) on the
mount (B in the figure), and push the right lever of the mount by about 5 mm
(0.2 in.) to the right (C in the figure) to attach (E in the figure) the connector
unit (D in the figure). Then, secure it with one screw (F in the figure).

242 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-52 Installing the XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A/
FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

E B

- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A/FRAME-B CPU memory unit

Insert the XSCF board into the left guide (A in the figure), and press down the
right connector unit (B in the figure) to attach the connector. Then, secure it
with two screws.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 243

 Figure 9-53 Installing the XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A/
FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

20. Attach the rear cover with two screws from the upper part of the rear side of
the CPU memory unit lower.

244 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-54 Screws for rear cover

21. Install the eight screws at both ends of the XSCF cable connection port on the
rear of the CPU memory unit lower.
For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, this step is not necessary.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 245

 Figure 9-55 Screws for both ends of the XSCF cable connection ports (for the
SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

9.7 Switching the microSD Card

After replacement of the CPU memory unit lower, the firmware version may be
different from the one before the replacement. To use the same firmware version as
that used before the replacement, remove the microSD card from the CPU memory
unit lower being replaced, and then install it in the replacement CPU memory unit
lower.
1. Remove the screw of the microSD card protective tape (A in the figure) that is
fixed on the removed CPU memory unit lower.

Note - Be careful not to drop the removed screw onto the board of the CPU memory unit
lower.

246 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-56 Screw for protective tape

2. Peel off the adhesive part (A in the figure) of the protective tape and remove
the protective tape.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 247

 Figure 9-57 Removing the protective tape

3. Push in the microSD card slightly with your finger and then release it.
The microSD card pops up slightly.
4. Pull out the microSD card horizontally.

248 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-58 Removing a microSD card

5. Remove the microSD card from the new CPU memory unit lower.
Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 4.
6. Insert the microSD card that was removed in step 4 into the microSD card slot
of the new CPU memory unit lower. Then, push it in with a finger until it locks
in place.

Note - With the pin surface of the microSD card facing downward, insert the card.
Note - Push in the microSD card firmly until you feel it lock in place.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 249

 Figure 9-59 Installing a microSD card

7. Place the protective tape of the microSD card back in place and attach the
adhesive part. Then, fix it with the screw.

Note - Be careful not to drop the screw being installed onto the board of the CPU memory
unit lower.
Note - Install the microSD card that was supplied with the new CPU memory unit lower in
the removed CPU memory unit, and return them together.

9.8 Removing Memory

This section describes the procedure for removing memory.

250 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
When replacing a CPU memory unit, you need to remount the memory. Mount the
memory in the same mounting locations as in the replaced unit.
For memory removal, see "2.2 Checking the Memory Configuration Rules," and
remove memory accordingly.

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Move the latch of the memory slot outward, and then remove the memory by
pulling it straight up.

Note - Place the removed memory on a grounded static-removal ESD mat.

Figure 9-60 Removing memory

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 251

9.9 Installing Memory
This section describes the procedure for installing memory. For memory installation,
see "2.2 Checking the Memory Configuration Rules," and install memory accordingly.
1. Fit the notched section of the memory into the corresponding position of the
connector of the memory slot.
2. Push the memory module into the slot evenly.

Note - Confirm that the latch of the memory slot has returned to its original position.

9.10 Installing a CPU Memory Unit

This section describes the procedure for installing a CPU memory unit.
Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use the SPARC
M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit.

Note - When mounting a CPU memory unit board, check the connectors on both of
the CPU memory unit board and frame beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and
all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If there is a bent pin in a connector, mounting
a CPU memory unit board may damage the CPU memory unit or frame. Also,
carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent.

9.10.1 Installing the CPU memory unit upper

Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To
determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 9-2.

Install the CPU memory unit upper on the CPU memory unit lower. When replacing
the CPU memory unit lower, install the CPU memory unit upper on the new CPU
memory unit lower.
For expansion of a CPU memory unit upper, perform the same procedure. When
removing the CPU memory unit upper, install a filler unit in its place.
1. When installing a filler unit for the CPU memory unit lower connected with
PCIe cables, push the PCIe cables (A and B in the figure) toward the outside
of the chassis.

252 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Note - Be careful when removing the filler unit so that it does not catch on any PCIe cable.
Note - Use PCIe cables without removing the packaging material covering the connector part
of the cable.
Note - The shortest PCIe cable is no longer necessary during maintenance. Connect it to the
removed CPU memory unit, and return them together.

Figure 9-61 How to push PCIe cables toward the outside

2. Install the CPU memory unit upper or filler unit on the CPU memory unit
lower.
- When installing the CPU memory unit upper
Carefully install the CPU memory unit upper by setting the four guides (A in
the figure) of the CPU memory unit upper into the grooves (B in the figure) of
the CPU memory unit lower.

Note - Confirm that the levers on the left and right sides of the CPU memory unit upper are
closed.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 253

 Figure 9-62 Guide positions of the CPU memory unit upper

A
A

B
A

B B

- When installing a filler unit

Install the filler unit by setting the two guides (A in the figure) of the filler unit
into the grooves (B in the figure) of the CPU memory unit lower.

254 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-63 Filler unit guide locations

3. Install the CPU memory unit upper by holding it down from the center where
the label "PUSH" is applied, and then push it into place.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 255

 Figure 9-64 Position where the CPU memory unit upper is pushed

4. Connect, to the CPU memory unit upper, the four right and left PCIe cables
connecting the CPU memory units upper and lower.
While pressing the pin that locks the PCIe cable, insert it vertically.

256 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Note - Of the two PCIe cables on the right side, also install the one (short) cable on the rear of
the CPU memory unit lower.

5. If a filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper has been installed, hold the
packaging material (A and B in the figure) of the PCIe cable connector part
over the top of the left- and right-side guides (C and D in the figure).

Figure 9-65 Packaging material of the PCIe cable connector part

6. Align the four clips on each of the left- and right-side guides to the grooves in
the frame of the CPU memory unit lower to install them. Slide in the guides to
lock them.

Note - When replacing the CPU memory unit lower, use the left- and right-side guides
supplied with the new CPU memory unit lower.
Note - Be careful not to damage any PCIe cable when installing the left- and right-side
guides. Also be careful not to pinch the packaging material of the PCIe cable connector part
with any clip on the left- and right-side guides.

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 257

 Figure 9-66 Locations of the clips on the left- and right-side guides (for the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

Figure 9-67 Locations of the clips on the left- and right-side guides (for the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

258 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-68 CPU memory unit upper and locations of the clips on the side guide
(for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 259

 Figure 9-69 CPU memory unit upper and locations of the clips on the side guide
(for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)

260 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 9-70 Filler unit of the CPU memory unit upper and locations of the clips
on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 261

 Figure 9-71 Filler unit of the CPU memory unit upper and locations of the clips
on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)

7. Unlock (push) the top cover of the CPU memory unit and install the cover by
sliding it.

Note - When replacing the CPU memory unit lower, use the top cover supplied with the new
CPU memory unit lower.

262 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis
1. With a hold on the Handling Position on both sides of the CPU memory unit,
insert the CPU memory unit into the chassis.
2. Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit to secure it.

Note - If the CPU memory unit is inserted into the chassis as far as it will go, it may not be
possible to lift the lever. Lift the lever just before the CPU memory unit lower hits the rear
and then push it fully home.

3. If a crossbar unit was mounted, install the mounting frame and then tighten
the three screws.
4. If any crossbar units were mounted, reinstall all of them.
For details, see "15.4 Installing a Crossbar Unit."
5. Install all the PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "8.5.3 Installing a PCI Express card cassette."

Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original locations by referring to the notes
that you made prior to the start of maintenance.

6. Lift the cable support to fix it.

For details, see "6.1.2 Fixing the cable support."
7. Connect the crossbar cables to the cable support.
For details, see "6.1.4 Attaching the crossbar cables to the cable support."
8. Connect all the cables of the external interface.
The cables to be connected are as follows.
■ Interface cable connected to the PCIe card
■ Crossbar cables (If equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx
is used, connect them in step 6.)
■ XSCF BB control cable
■ XSCF DUAL control cable
■ XSCF-LAN cable
■ Serial cable
■ LAN cable
■ SAS cable
■ USB cable

Note - Reinstall the cables in the correct positions by referring to the notes you made before
starting maintenance.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory Unit/Memory 263

 continue maintenance work.

264 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 10

Maintaining the Internal Disks

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the internal disks mounted in
the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. An internal disk can be replaced, expanded, or reduced.
■ Before Maintaining an Internal Disk
■ Configuration of the Internal Disks
■ FRU Removal and Installation Flow
■ Removing an Internal Disk
■ Installing an Internal Disk

10.1 Before Maintaining an Internal Disk

This chapter only has descriptions of the internal disk configuration and the work of
removing and installing internal disks.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on internal disks, also see "Internal disk" in "Table 7-2
List of available maintenance types by FRU."

10.2 Configuration of the Internal Disks

This section describes the configuration and locations of the internal disks.
The chassis has eight slots for mounting internal disks. The system memory storage
can be expanded by installing extra hard disk drives (HDDs) or solid state drives
(SSDs) in these slots.

265
 Figure 10-1 Location of internal disks

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Location number Component

1 Internal disk (HDD#0)

2 Internal disk (HDD#1)
3 Internal disk (HDD#2)
4 Internal disk (HDD#3)
5 Internal disk (HDD#4)
6 Internal disk (HDD#5)
7 Internal disk (HDD#6)
8 Internal disk (HDD#7)

10.3 FRU Removal and Installation Flow

Perform maintenance work on internal disks by following the procedures shown in
Figure 10-2, Table 10-1, Table 10-2, and Table 10-3.

266 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 10-2 Maintenance workflow

Replacement Installation Removal

1. Remove internal disk 1. Remove internal 1. Remove internal disk

disk filler

2. Install internal disk 2. Install internal disk 2. Install internal disk filler

(Go to "Chapter 7 (Go to "Chapter 7 (Go to "Chapter 7

Maintenance Flow") Maintenance Flow") Maintenance Flow")

Table 10-1 Internal disk replacement workflow and procedures

Item Replacement work procedure Reference

1 Removing an internal disk "10.4 Removing an Internal Disk"

2 Installing an internal disk "10.5 Installing an Internal Disk"

Table 10-2 Internal disk installation workflow and procedures

Item Replacement work procedure Reference

1 Installing an internal disk "10.5 Installing an Internal Disk"

Table 10-3 Internal disk removal workflow and procedures

Item Replacement work procedure Reference

1 Removing an internal disk "10.4 Removing an Internal Disk"

10.4 Removing an Internal Disk

This section describes the procedure for removing an internal disk. Perform
reduction using the same procedure.
Make the internal disk ready for removal before attempting to remove it. For details,
follow the procedure in "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Push the knob on the internal disk to unlock it and then raise the lever to a
45-degree angle.

Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks 267

 Figure 10-3 Knob on internal disk

2. Hold the lever and pull out the internal disk by about 3 cm (1.2 in.)

Note - When performing active/hot maintenance, at this point wait until the motor stops
rotating (about 1 minute).

268 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 10-4 Removing an internal disk

3. Carefully remove the internal disk from its slot.

Note - Place the removed internal disk on the grounded antistatic ESD mat.

4. When reducing an internal disk, install the internal disk filler unit in the slot
from which the disk was removed.

Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks 269

 Figure 10-5 Installing the disk filler

10.5 Installing an Internal Disk

This section describes the procedure for installing an internal disk. Perform
expansion using the same procedure.
1. When expanding an internal disk, remove the internal disk filler unit from the
slot in which the disk is to be installed.
2. With the lever opened, hold the internal disk.
3. Carefully insert the internal disk into the slot.

Note - Do not force the internal disk into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the
component or the chassis.

4. Close the lever to secure the internal disk.

Note - Ensure that the internal disks are firmly inserted and secured.

270 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to
continue maintenance work.

Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks 271

272 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 11

Maintaining the Fan Units

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan units mounted in the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■ Configuration of the Fan Units
■ Removing a Fan Unit
■ Installing a Fan Unit

11.1 Before Maintaining a Fan Unit

This chapter only has descriptions of the fan unit configuration and the work of
removing and installing fan units.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on fan units, also see "Fan unit" in "Table 7-2 List of
available maintenance types by FRU."

11.2 Configuration of the Fan Units

This section describes the configuration and the locations of the fan units.
Five fan units are mounted in each chassis. Each fan unit has two cooling fans that
cool the components in the chassis.
If a fault occurs with a cooling fan during system operation, the XSCF detects the
error. However, the system can continue operating because the fans have a
redundant configuration.

273
 Figure 11-1 Location of fan units

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Location number Component

1 Fan unit (FANU#0)

2 Fan unit (FANU#1)
3 Fan unit (FANU#2)
4 Fan unit (FANU#3)
5 Fan unit (FANU#4)

11.3 Removing a Fan Unit

This section describes the procedure for removing a fan unit. Enable the removal of
the fan unit before attempting to remove it. For details, follow the procedure in
"Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

274 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 1. Pull out the fan unit while raising its lever.

Figure 11-2 Lever of fan unit

2. Carefully remove the fan unit from its slot.

Note - Place the removed fan unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

11.4 Installing a Fan Unit

This section describes the procedure for installing a fan unit.
1. Carefully insert the fan unit into its slot.

Note - Do not force the fan unit into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the
component or the chassis.

Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 275

 2. Push the fan unit fully home.

Note - Check that the fan unit is fully inserted and secured.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

continue maintenance work.

276 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 12

Maintaining the Power Supply Units

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the power supply units
mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■ Configuration of the Power Supply Units
■ Removing a Power Supply Unit
■ Installing a Power Supply Unit

12.1 Before Maintaining a Power Supply

Unit
This chapter only has descriptions of the power supply unit configuration and the
work of removing and installing power supply units.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on power supply units, also see "Power supply unit" in
"Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types by FRU."

12.2 Configuration of the Power Supply

Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the power supply units.
The power supply units feed power to the individual components. The components
can have the 1+1 redundant configuration. Active/hot maintenance can be performed.

277
 Figure 12-1 Location of power supply unit

(1) (2)

Location number Component

1 Power supply unit (PSU#0)

2 Power supply unit (PSU#1)

12.3 Removing a Power Supply Unit

This section describes the procedure for removing a power supply unit. Enable the
removal of the power supply unit before attempting to remove it. For details, follow
the procedure in "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance.
2. Loosen the screws securing the power supply unit and open the lever.

278 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 12-2 Screws securing power supply unit

3. Hold the lever and pull the power supply unit out of the chassis.
4. Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and remove it
carefully from its slot.

Note - Place the removed power supply unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

12.4 Installing a Power Supply Unit

This section describes the procedure for installing a power supply unit.
1. Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and insert it
carefully into its slot.

Note - Do not forcibly push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may
damage the component or the chassis.

2. Firmly push the power supply unit into its mounting position.
3. Close the lever and then tighten the screws.
4. Connect the power cords to the power supply unit.

Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 279

 The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to
continue maintenance work.

280 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 13

Maintaining the PSU Backplane

Unit/Operation Panel

This chapter describes the procedures for maintaining the PSU backplane unit and
operation panel mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■ Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel
■ Locations of the PSU Backplane Unit and Operation Panel
■ Maintenance Precautions
■ FRU Removal and Installation Flow
■ Removing the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel
■ Installing the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel

13.1 Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane

Unit/Operation Panel
This chapter only has descriptions of the PSU backplane unit/operation panel
location and the work of removing and installing the PSU backplane unit/operation
panel.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on the PSU backplane unit/operation panel, also see
"PSU backplane unit" and "Operation panel" in "Table 7-2 List of available
maintenance types by FRU."

13.2 Locations of the PSU Backplane Unit

and Operation Panel
This section describes the locations of the PSU backplane unit and operation panel.

281
 The PSU backplane unit has connectors for connecting multiple power supply units.

Caution - Do not replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory
unit. If you replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory unit, the
system may fail to operate normally. Replace either the PSU backplane unit or the
CPU memory unit, and confirm that the newly installed part is normal by using the
showhardconf or showstatus command. Then, replace the other FRU.

Figure 13-1 Location of the PSU backplane unit

(1)

Location Component
number

1 PSU backplane unit (PSUBP)

282 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 13-2 Location of the operation panel

(1)

Location number Component

1 Operation panel (OPNL)

13.3 Maintenance Precautions

This section describes precautions for maintaining the PSU backplane unit and
operation panel.
■ Do not replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory unit. If
you replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory unit, the
system may fail to operate normally. Replace either the PSU backplane unit or the
CPU memory unit, and confirm that the newly installed part is normal by using
the showhardconf or showstatus command. Then, replace the other FRU.
■ To replace the operation panel, remove the PSU backplane from the chassis.
■ To replace the operation panel on the SPARC M10-4S, you need to set the BB-ID of
the replacement operation panel to the same value as that before maintenance.

Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 283

13.4 FRU Removal and Installation Flow
Perform maintenance work on the PSU backplane unit and operation panel by
following the procedures shown in Figure 13-3 and Table 13-1.
The workflow assumes that the chassis requiring maintenance has been removed in
"7.2 FRU Replacement Workflow."

Figure 13-3 Maintenance workflow

(Remove chassis requiring maintenance)

1. Enable removal of PSU backplane unit

2. Remove PSU backplane unit

3. Remove operation panel

4. Install operation panel

5. Install PSU backplane unit

(Restore chassis requiring maintenance)

284 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Table 13-1 Maintenance workflow and procedures
Item Maintenance work procedure Reference

1 Accessing a CPU memory unit 9.5.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit

2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the 9.5.2 Removing a CPU memory unit from the chassis
chassis
3 Removing an internal disk 10.4 Removing an Internal Disk
4 Removing all the fan units 11.3 Removing a Fan Unit
5 Removing a power supply unit 12.3 Removing a Power Supply Unit
6 Removing the PSU backplane unit 13.5.1 Removing the PSU backplane unit
7 Removing the operation panel 13.5.2 Removing the operation panel
8 Installing the operation panel 13.6.1 Installing the operation panel
9 Installing the PSU backplane unit 13.6.2 Installing the PSU backplane unit
10 Installing a power supply unit 12.4 Installing a Power Supply Unit
11 Installing all the fan units 11.4 Installing a Fan Unit
12 Installing an internal disk 10.5 Installing an Internal Disk
13 Installing the CPU memory unit in the 9.10.2 Installing the CPU memory unit in the chassis
chassis

13.5 Removing the PSU Backplane

Unit/Operation Panel

13.5.1 Removing the PSU backplane unit

This section describes the procedure for removing the PSU backplane unit from the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. Enable the removal of the PSU backplane unit before
attempting to remove it. For details, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Loosen the two screws in the fan slot and then remove the fan shelf.

Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 285

 Figure 13-4 Screws in the fan slot

2. Loosen the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit and then partially
pull out the PSU backplane unit.

Figure 13-5 Screws securing the PSU backplane unit

3. Pull the PSU backplane unit out a little more. Then, remove the unit by holding
its handle.

Note - Place the removed PSU backplane unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

286 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 13-6 Handle of PSU backplane unit

13.5.2 Removing the operation panel

1. Check the BB-ID switch on the operation panel, and record the set BB-ID of
the chassis requiring maintenance.
2. Remove the cable from the operation panel and loosen one screw (A in the
figure).

Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 287

 Figure 13-7 Cables and screws of the operation panel

3. Pull the operation panel forward to remove it.

Note - Place the removed operation panel on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

13.6 Installing the PSU Backplane

Unit/Operation Panel

13.6.1 Installing the operation panel

1. Set the BB-ID of the operation panel to the value prior to the start of
maintenance.
2. Insert the operation panel at the installation location, and connect one cable
to the operation panel.

288 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 3. Tighten the screws on the operation panel to secure it to the PSU backplane
unit.

13.6.2 Installing the PSU backplane unit

This section describes the procedure for installing the PSU backplane unit.
1. Insert the PSU backplane unit into the chassis by holding the handle.
2. Tighten the two screws on the PSU backplane unit to secure it to the chassis.
3. Reinstall the fan shelf and then tighten the two screws in the fan slot.
The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to
continue maintenance work.

Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit/Operation Panel 289

290 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 14

Maintaining the Crossbar Cables

This chapter describes the procedures for maintaining the crossbar cables.
■ Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable
■ Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables
■ Removing the Crossbar Cables
■ Installing the Crossbar Cables

14.1 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable

This chapter only has descriptions of the port configuration for crossbar cables and
the work of removing and installing crossbar cables.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on crossbar cables, also see "Crossbar cable" in "Table
7-2 List of available maintenance types by FRU."

14.2 Configuration of the Ports for the

Crossbar Cables
This section describes the configuration and locations of the ports for connecting the
crossbar cables.
The crossbar cables are used to connect the SPARC M10-4S units to one another or to
connect the SPARC M10-4S to a crossbar box in a building block configuration (with
a crossbar box).
Each crossbar cable has a number that corresponds to a port number on the chassis.
A port number is assigned to each pair of ports. So crossbar cables should be
replaced as a pair.

291
 Figure 14-1 Ports for connecting crossbar cables (SPARC M10-4S)

XBU#0 XBU#1

2R 2R 2R 2R

2L 2L 2L 2L

1R 1R 1R 1R

1L 1L 1L 1L

0R 0R 0R 0R

0L 0L 0L 0L

Figure 14-2 Ports for connecting crossbar cables (crossbar box)

L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
#2
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7

L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
#1
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7

L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
#0
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7

292 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Figure 14-3 Crossbar cables (electrical)

Location Component
number

1 Crossbar cables (electrical) (CBL)

Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables 293

 Figure 14-4 Crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S)

Figure 14-5 Crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box)

Location Component
number

1 Crossbar cables (optical) (CBL)

294 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
14.3 Removing the Crossbar Cables
This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar cables. Enable the
removal of the crossbar cables before attempting to remove them. For details, follow
the procedure in "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Remove the two crossbar cables from the SPARC M10-4S.

Remove each crossbar cable by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the cable and
pulling it straight out in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the
cable part when pulling out the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the
connector lock completely released may cause damage.

Figure 14-6 Removing the crossbar cables (electrical)

Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables 295

 Figure 14-7 Removing the crossbar cables (optical)

2. Remove the two crossbar cables from the other chassis.

Remove each crossbar cable by holding the tab of the cable and pulling it
straight out in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the cable part
when pulling out the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the connector
lock completely released may cause damage.

Note - There is no problem if you remove the crossbar cables from the crossbar box while
electricity is supplied.
Note - The cables at the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the
right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. Therefore, to remove the crossbar
cables, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.

296 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Figure 14-8 Removing the crossbar cables (crossbar box)

14.4 Installing the Crossbar Cables

This section describes the procedure for connecting the crossbar cables.
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement
crossbar cable.
For the new crossbar cable, use the same type of label as the one on the cable
requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2. Connect a pair of crossbar cables to each chassis.
Insert each crossbar cable by holding the connector part of the cable and
inserting it straight into the opening. Do not hold the cable part when inserting
the cable.

Note - There is no problem if you connect the crossbar cables (optical) at the crossbar box
while electricity is supplied.
Note - If you insert a connector with the tab pulled, the connector may be damaged.
Note - Confirm that the crossbar cables are correctly connected and firmly secured.
Note - After installing the crossbar cables, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle the
cables on the rear side together and secure them to the cable support.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

continue maintenance work.

Chapter 14 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables 297

298 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 15

Maintaining the Crossbar Units

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar units mounted on
a SPARC M10-4S.
■ Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
■ Configuration of the Crossbar Units
■ Removing a Crossbar Unit
■ Installing a Crossbar Unit

15.1 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit

This chapter only has descriptions of the crossbar unit configuration and the work of
removing and installing crossbar units.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on crossbar units, also see "Crossbar unit" in "Table 7-2
List of available maintenance types by FRU."

15.2 Configuration of the Crossbar Units

This section describes the configuration and the locations of the crossbar units.
The crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S are connected to the crossbar units of other
SPARC M10-4S units or to a crossbar box for system extension. Two crossbar units
are mounted on a SPARC M10-4S. When performing maintenance, perform the work
one unit at a time.

299
 Figure 15-1 Location of crossbar units

㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀

Location number Component

1 Crossbar unit (XBU#0)

2 Crossbar unit (XBU#1)

15.3 Removing a Crossbar Unit

This section describes the procedure for removing a crossbar unit. Enable the
removal of the crossbar unit before attempting to remove it. For details, follow the
procedure in "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. If the crossbar cables are fixed to the cable support with the hook-and-loop
fastener, remove the hook-and-loop fastener.

300 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
2. Remove all the crossbar cables connected to the crossbar units requiring
maintenance.
3. Loosen the two screws securing the crossbar unit.

Figure 15-2 Location of screws securing crossbar units

4. Open the eject levers (A in the figure) upwards and downwards, respectively,
and then pull the crossbar unit out of the CPU memory unit.

Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 301

 Figure 15-3 Opening the eject levers

5. Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and carefully remove it
from the mounting frame.

Note - Place the removed crossbar unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.

15.4 Installing a Crossbar Unit

This section describes the procedure for installing a crossbar unit.

Note - When mounting a crossbar unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis
and crossbar unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly
arranged in lines. If a crossbar unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the
chassis or crossbar unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to
prevent any pin from being bent.

302 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
1. Open the eject levers of the crossbar unit.
2. Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and then carefully insert
it into the mounting frame.
3. Close the eject levers and tighten the two screws securing the crossbar unit.

Note - When installing a crossbar unit, insert it to the back of the device with the eject levers
kept open. That is, leave the levers in their up and down positions. If you close the eject
levers before inserting the crossbar unit, you cannot install it.
Once you insert the crossbar unit to the back of the device, the eject levers move in the
directions of their closed positions. Push the eject levers by hand to securely close them.

4. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit.

Note - Connect the crossbar cables correctly according to the corresponding cable position
labels.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

continue maintenance work.

Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 303

304 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 16

Maintaining the XSCF BB Control

Cables

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF BB control cables.
■ Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable
■ Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables
■ Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable
■ Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable

16.1 Before Maintaining an XSCF BB

Control Cable
This chapter only has descriptions of the port configuration for XSCF BB control
cables and the work of removing and installing XSCF BB control cables.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on XSCF BB control cables, also see "XSCF BB control
cable" in "Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types by FRU."

16.2 Configuration of the Ports for the

XSCF BB Control Cables
This section describes the configuration and the location of the ports to which the
XSCF BB control cables are connected.
The XSCF BB control cables are used to connect the XSCFs mounted in the SPARC
M10-4S or crossbar box chassis.

305
 Figure 16-1 Locations of XSCF BB control cables (SPARC M10-4S)

(1)

Figure 16-2 Locations of XSCF BB control cables (crossbar box)

(1)

Location Component
number

1 XSCF BB control cables (SCF_CBL)

306 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
16.3 Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable
This section describes the procedure for removing the XSCF BB control cables.
Enable removal of the XSCF BB control cables before attempting to remove them. For
details, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Remove the XSCF BB control cable from the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar
box.
Pull out an XSCF BB control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in
the figure) on the both sides of the cable.

Note - The cables on the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the
right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. When removing the XSCF BB
control cables, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.

Figure 16-3 Removing the XSCF BB control cables (SPARC M10-4S)

A A

Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 307

 Figure 16-4 Removing the XSCF BB control cables (crossbar box)

2. Remove the XSCF BB control cables from the other chassis.

Pull out an XSCF BB control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in
the figure) on the both sides of the cable.

16.4 Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable

This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF BB control cables.
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement
XSCF BB control cable.
For the new XSCF BB control cable, use the same type of label as the one on the
cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2. Connect the XSCF BB control cable to SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box.

308 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Note - Check that the XSCF BB control cables are correctly connected and secure.
Note - After connecting the XSCF BB control cable, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle
the cables together and secure them to the rear cable support.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

continue maintenance work.

Chapter 16 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 309

310 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Chapter 17

Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control

Cables

This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF DUAL control cables.
■ Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
■ Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports
■ Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
■ Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable

17.1 Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL

Control Cable
This chapter only has descriptions of the XSCF DUAL control port configuration and
the work of removing and installing XSCF DUAL control cables.
Before removing an FRU, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" and perform the
necessary work items.
For the types of maintenance on XSCF DUAL control cables, also see "XSCF DUAL
control cable" in "Table 7-2 List of available maintenance types by FRU."

17.2 Configuration of the XSCF DUAL

Control Ports
This section describes configuration and location of the XSCF DUAL control ports.
The XSCF DUAL control cable is used to connect the master XSCF and a standby
XSCF that are mounted on a SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box so as to duplicate the
XSCF.

311
 Figure 17-1 Location of XSCF DUAL control port (SPARC M10-4S)

(1)

Figure 17-2 Location of XSCF DUAL control port (crossbar box)

(1)

Location number Component

1 XSCF DUAL control cables (SCF_DUAL)

312 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
17.3 Removing an XSCF DUAL Control
Cable
This section describes the procedure for removing an XSCF DUAL control cable.
Enable the removal of the XSCF DUAL control cables before attempting to remove
them. For details, see "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow."

Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Precautions
on Static Electricity."

1. Remove the XSCF DUAL control cables from the SPARC M10-4S or the
crossbar box.
Pull out the XSCF DUAL control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A
in the figure) on the both sides of the cable.

Note - The cables at the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the
right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the XSCF DUAL control
cables, therefore, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.

Figure 17-3 Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables (SPARC M10-4S)

Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 313

 Figure 17-4 Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables (crossbar box)

2. Remove the XSCF DUAL control cables from the other chassis.
Pull out the XSCF DUAL control cable while pushing the lock release buttons on
the both sides of the cable.

17.4 Installing an XSCF DUAL Control

Cable
This section describes the procedure for installing an XSCF DUAL control cable.
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the replacement XSCF
DUAL control cable.
For the new XSCF DUAL control cable, use the same type of label as the one on
the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2. Connect the XSCF DUAL control cable to SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box.

Note - Check that XSCF DUAL control cable is correctly connected and secure.
Note - After connecting the XSCF DUAL control cable, use the hook-and-loop fastener to
bundle the cables together and fasten them to rear cable support.

The FRU installation work is completed. See "Chapter 7 Maintenance Flow" to

continue maintenance work.

314 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Appendix A

Component List

This appendix describes the components in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S configuration.

Figure A-1 Locations of components of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S

(1)

(16)
(15)
(2) (14)
(3)
(2)
(13)

(18)
(4)
(5)
(12)
(6)

(7) (11)

(17)

(8)
(10)

(9)

315
 Location number Component

1 CPU memory unit upper

2 Side cover
3 Memory
4 PSU backplane unit
5 Fan shelf
6 Fan unit
7 Front cover
8 Internal disk
9 Power supply unit
10 Operation panel
11 PCI Express card cassette
12 PCI Express card
13 Crossbar unit mounting frame (*1)
14 Crossbar unit (*1)
15 CPU memory unit lower
16 CMU filler unit
17 Disk filler
18 PCIe card filler
*1 Not mounted on the SPARC M10-4.

316 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Appendix B

Component Specifications

This appendix provides the specifications of the components.

The components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box are
as follows.

Components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S

■ CPU Memory Unit
■ Crossbar Unit
■ Power Supply Unit
■ Fan Unit
■ Internal Disk Drive
■ PCI Express Card
■ Backplanes
■ Operation Panel

B.1 CPU Memory Unit

The CPU memory unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S consists of two units: the upper
unit and lower unit.
The CPU memory unit lower consists of the following components.
■ CPU
■ Memory
■ XSCF
■ PCI Express (PCIe) backplane
The CPU memory unit upper consists of the following components.
■ CPU
■ Memory
CPU and XSCF are directly installed on the CPU memory unit. Thus you cannot

317
 replace the CPU and XSCF individually.
Each CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower is available in eight
different types based on the combination of CPU type and the number of memory
slots.
Table B-1 lists the specifications of the CPU memory unit.

Table B-1 Specifications of CPU memory unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Maximum number of 2
CPU memory units
Location Inside of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement, expansion, and reduction

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 9 Maintaining the CPU Memory
Unit/Memory."

B.2 Crossbar Unit

The crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box are crossbar switches
that logically connect the CPU memory unit and I/O unit. The crossbar unit has two
operation modes. One is normal mode that provides 2-way operation. The other is
degraded mode that provides 1-way operation, which is half of normal mode.
Table B-2 lists the specifications of the crossbar units in the SPARC M10-4S.

Table B-2 Specifications of crossbar unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Number of crossbar units 2

Location Rear of chassis

Type of maintenance Inactive/cold and system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 15 Maintaining the Crossbar Units."

B.3 Power Supply Unit

The power supply units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box take
power from the input power and supply it to the system. The redundant configuration

318 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 of the power supply units allows the system to continue operating even if one of the
units fails during operation.
Table B-3 lists the specifications of the power supply units in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.

Table B-3 Specifications of the power supply unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Number of power supply 2

units
Location Front of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/hot, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, system-stopped/cold, and
system-stopped/hot
Maintenance category Replacement

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 12 Maintaining the Power Supply
Units."

B.4 Fan Unit

Five fan units are mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and four on the crossbar
box. They provide a flow of air to cool the inside of the chassis. Each fan unit has two
cooling fans.
Table B-4 lists the specifications of the fan units in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.

Table B-4 Specifications of fan unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Number of fan units 5

Location Front of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/hot, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, system-stopped/hot, and
system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units."

B.5 Internal Disk Drive

Up to eight hard disks or solid state disks can be mounted as internal disks on
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
Table B-5 lists the specifications of the internal disk drive.

Appendix B Component Specifications 319

 Table B-5 Specifications of the internal disk drive (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item Description

Maximum number of 8
internal disk drives
Interface SAS
Location Front of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/hot, active/hot (using DR), inactive/hot, system-stopped/
hot, and system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement, expansion, and reduction

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 10 Maintaining the Internal Disks."

B.6 PCI Express Card

Up to eight PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4S with a crossbar unit
mounted. For a SPARC M10-4 with no crossbar unit mounted, up to 11 PCIe cards
can be mounted.
Table B-6 lists the specifications of the PCIe card.

Table B-6 Specifications of PCIe card (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Maximum number of 11 (*1)

PCIe cards
Location Rear of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/hot (using PHP), active/hot (using DR), inactive/hot,
system-stopped/hot, and system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement, expansion, and reduction
*1 Can be mounted only on a SPARC M10-4.

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 8 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards."

B.7 Backplanes
The backplane of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is a unit with connectors for connecting
replaceable units in the chassis. The PSU backplane unit of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
mounts the memory that stores the identification information and the user setting
information.

320 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
The backplane of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is shown below.
■ PSU backplane (A in the figure)

Figure B-1 Location of backplane of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S

The PSU backplane is installed on the PSU backplane unit. The PSU backplane alone
cannot be replaced. Replace it together with the PSU backplane unit.
Table B-7 lists the specifications of the PSU backplane unit.

Table B-7 Specifications of PSU backplane unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Number of PSU 1
backplane units
Location Inside of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement

Appendix B Component Specifications 321

 For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane
Unit/Operation Panel."

B.8 Operation Panel

The operation panel of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is installed on the front of the
chassis. This panel displays the system status and is used for operation.
Table B-8 lists the specifications of the operation panel of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.

Table B-8 Specifications of operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)

Item Description

Number of operation 1
panels
Location Front of chassis
Type of maintenance Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system-stopped/cold
Maintenance category Replacement

For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 13 Maintaining the PSU Backplane
Unit/Operation Panel."

322 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Appendix C

Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting

Commands

This appendix describes how to use Oracle Solaris commands to display fault
diagnosis information and to take countermeasures. The commands listed here are
useful for determining whether there are problems in the system, the network, or
some other system connected through the network.
■ iostat(1M) Command
■ prtdiag(1M) Command
■ prtconf(1M) Command
■ netstat(1M) Command
■ ping(1M) Command
■ ps(1) Command
■ prstat(1M) Command

C.1 iostat(1M) Command

The iostat(1M) command is used to regularly report the CPU usage status, as well as
the terminal status, the drive status, and the I/O status.
Table C-1 lists the options of the iostat(1M) command and how those options can be
applied to solving system issues.

Table C-1 iostat(1M) command options

Option Description Application

No options Reports the status of the local I/O Allows you to view the device
device. status concisely in 3 lines.
-c Reports, as ratios, the length of time Allows you to view the CPU status
that the system has been in user as a concise report.
mode, in system mode, waiting for
I/O, and idling.

323
 Table C-1 iostat(1M) command options (continued)
Option Description Application

-e Displays a summary of statistics on Allows you to view the accumulated

device errors. The displayed items number of errors as a concise table
are the total number of errors, and to identify potentially failed
hardware errors, software errors, I/O devices.
and transfer errors.
-E Displays statistics on all the device Allows you to view device
errors. information (manufacturer, model
number, serial number, size, and
errors).
-n Displays the names in a descriptive Allows you to identify devices with
form. a descriptive display.
-x Reports the extended drive statistics Allows you to find internal devices
of individual drives. Statistics are and other I/O devices on the
displayed in a table format. network whose performance is low.
Similar to the -e option, but differs
in that it provides rate information.

The following example shows the output from the iostat(1M) command.

# iostat -En
c5t50000393D85129FAd0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: 0
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC201AL6
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
c3t50000393D851FDAAd0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: 0
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC201AMS
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
c4t50000393D822D2B6d0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: 0
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC2015P8
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
c2t50000393E8001BB6d0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: 0
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC301AV6
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
#

324 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
C.2 prtdiag(1M) Command
The prtdiag(1M) command displays the system settings and diagnosis information.
The diagnosis information shows FRUs in the system that experienced errors.
The prtdiag(1M) command is in the following directory: /usr/platform/platform-
name/sbin/.
The prtdiag(1M) command may display a slot number that differs from those
supposed to be displayed according to other parts of this manual. This does not
indicate a fault.
Table C-2 lists the options of the prtdiag(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.

Table C-2 prtdiag(1M) command options

Option Description Application

No options Displays a list of components. Allows you to check the CPU

information, the memory
configuration, the mounted PCI
Express (PCIe) cards, the OpenBoot
PROM version, the mode switch
status, and the CPU operational
mode.
-v Displays information in detailed In addition to the content displayed
(Verbose) mode. when no option is specified, this
option allows you to check detailed
information of the PCIe card.

The following example shows the output from the prtdiag(1M) command.

# prtdiag -v
System Configuration: Oracle Corporation sun4v SPARC M10-4
Memory size: 64000 Megabytes

================================ Virtual CPUs ================================

CPU ID Frequency Implementation Status

------ --------- ---------------------- -------
0 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
1 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
2 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
3 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
4 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
5 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
6 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
7 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
8 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
9 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
10 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line

Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 325

 11 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
------------------------Omitted------------------------
59 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
60 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
61 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
62 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line
63 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line

======================= Physical Memory Configuration ========================

Segment Table:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Base Segment Interleave Bank Contains
Address Size Factor Size Modules
--------------------------------------------------------------
0x0 32 GB 4 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM00A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM01A
8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM02A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM03A
8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM04A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM05A
8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM06A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM07A

0x20000000000 32 GB 4 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM10A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM11A
8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM12A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM13A
8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM14A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM15A
8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM16A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM17A

================================ IO Devices ================================

Slot + Bus Name + Model Speed
Status Type Path
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
/BB0/CMUL/SASHBA PCIE scsi-pciex1000,87 LSI,2308_2 5.0GTx8
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0
/BB0/CMUL/NET0 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9/network@0
/BB0/CMUL/NET1 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9/network@0,1
/BB0/CMUL/NET2 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a/network@0
/BB0/CMUL/NET3 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a/network@0,1
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE ethernet-pciex1077,8000 5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@0/ethernet@0
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE ethernet-pciex1077,8000 5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@0/ethernet@0,1
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE QLGC,qlc-pciex1077,8001 QLE8152 5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/

326 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
pci@0/pci@0/QLGC,qlc@0,2
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE QLGC,qlc-pciex1077,8001 QLE8152 5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@0/QLGC,qlc@0,3
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE emlx-pciex10df,f100 LPe12002-M8-FJ2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@10/pci@0/pci@0/emlx@0
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE emlx-pciex10df,f100 LPe12002-M8-FJ2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@10/pci@0/pci@0/emlx@0,1
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,1
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,2
/BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,3
MB PCIX usb-pciclass,0c0310 --
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@1/pci@0/usb@4
MB PCIX usb-pciclass,0c0320 --
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@1/pci@0/usb@4,1

============================ Environmental Status ============================

============================ FRU Status ============================

Location Name Status
------------------------------------------------------
SYS enabled

============================ FW Version ============================

Version
------------------------------------------------------------
2002

====================== System PROM revisions =======================

Version
------------------------------------------------------------
OBP 4.34.0 2012/08/15 17:56

Chassis Serial Number

---------------------
2081203001
#

Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 327

C.3 prtconf(1M) Command
The prtconf(1M) command displays the configured devices.
The prtconf(1M) command identifies hardware units recognized by Oracle Solaris.
When a software application experiences a hardware-related issue even though there
is no hardware error, this command allows you to check whether Oracle Solaris
recognizes the hardware and whether the hardware drivers are loaded.
Table C-3 lists the options of the prtconf(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.

Table C-3 prtconf(1M) command options

Option Description Application

No options Displays the device tree for the A hardware device is regarded as
devices recognized by Oracle Solaris. operating normally if it is
recognized. If the message "(driver
not attached)" is displayed for a
device or a sub-device, the driver
for the device is corrupted or does
not exist.
-D Outputs content similar to that of Allows you to check the driver
no options but differs in that the necessary for Oracle Solaris to
displayed content contains device enable the device, or to view a list
driver names. of drivers to be used.
-p Outputs content similar to that of Allows you to view the devices as a
no options but differs in that the simple list.
display is simpler.
-V Displays the version and date of the Allows you to quickly check the
OpenBoot PROM firmware. firmware version.

The following example shows the output from the prtconf(1M) command.

# prtconf
System Configuration: Oracle Corporation sun4v
Memory size: 131304 Megabytes
System Peripherals (Software Nodes):

ORCL,SPARC64-X
scsi_vhci, instance #0
packages (driver not attached)
SUNW,builtin-drivers (driver not attached)
SUNW,probe-error-handler (driver not attached)
deblocker (driver not attached)
disk-label (driver not attached)
terminal-emulator (driver not attached)
dropins (driver not attached)
SUNW,asr (driver not attached)
kbd-translator (driver not attached)
obp-tftp (driver not attached)

328 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 zfs-file-system (driver not attached)
hsfs-file-system (driver not attached)
chosen (driver not attached)
openprom (driver not attached)
client-services (driver not attached)
options, instance #0
aliases (driver not attached)
memory (driver not attached)
virtual-memory (driver not attached)
iscsi-hba (driver not attached)
disk (driver not attached)
virtual-devices, instance #0
console, instance #0
rtc (driver not attached)
flashprom (driver not attached)
console (driver not attached)
channel-devices, instance #0
virtual-channel, instance #0
virtual-channel, instance #3
virtual-console-concentrator, instance #0
virtual-network-switch, instance #0
virtual-disk-server, instance #0
virtual-channel-client, instance #1
virtual-channel-client, instance #2
pciv-communication, instance #0
virtual-domain-service, instance #0
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
------------------------Omitted------------------------
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
pci, instance #0
pci, instance #0
pci, instance #1
pci, instance #2
scsi, instance #0
iport, instance #8
smp, instance #3
disk, instance #8
enclosure, instance #3
iport, instance #11
pci, instance #3
pci, instance #5
usb, instance #0
usb, instance #0
hub, instance #0
pci, instance #4
network, instance #0
network, instance #1
pci, instance #6
network, instance #2

Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 329

 network, instance #3
pci, instance #1
pci, instance #7
pci, instance #8
pci, instance #9
pci, instance #10
pci, instance #11
pci, instance #2
pci, instance #12
pci, instance #13
pci, instance #14
pci, instance #15
pci, instance #16
pci, instance #17
pci, instance #3
pci, instance #18
pci, instance #19
pci, instance #20
pci, instance #21
pci, instance #22
pci, instance #23
pci, instance #4
pci, instance #24
pci, instance #25
pci, instance #26
scsi, instance #1
iport, instance #6
smp, instance #1
disk, instance #6
enclosure, instance #1
iport, instance #9
pci, instance #27
pci, instance #29
usb, instance #1
usb, instance #1
hub, instance #2
pci, instance #28
network, instance #4
network, instance #5
pci, instance #30
network, instance #6
network, instance #7
------------------------Omitted------------------------
pci, instance #22
pci, instance #101
pci, instance #102
pci, instance #103
pci, instance #104
pci, instance #19
pci, instance #105
pci, instance #23
pci, instance #106
pci, instance #107
pci, instance #108
pci, instance #109

330 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 pci-performance-counters, instance #0
pci-performance-counters, instance #1
pci-performance-counters, instance #2
pci-performance-counters, instance #3
pci-performance-counters, instance #4
pci-performance-counters, instance #5
pci-performance-counters, instance #6
pci-performance-counters, instance #7
pci-performance-counters, instance #8
pci-performance-counters, instance #9
pci-performance-counters, instance #10
pci-performance-counters, instance #11
pci-performance-counters, instance #12
pci-performance-counters, instance #13
pci-performance-counters, instance #14
pci-performance-counters, instance #15
pci-performance-counters, instance #16
pci-performance-counters, instance #20
pci-performance-counters, instance #17
pci-performance-counters, instance #21
pci-performance-counters, instance #18
pci-performance-counters, instance #22
pci-performance-counters, instance #19
pci-performance-counters, instance #23
ramdisk-root (driver not attached)
os-io (driver not attached)
fcoe, instance #0
iscsi, instance #0
pseudo, instance #0
#

C.4 netstat(1M) Command

The netstat(1M) command displays the network status and the protocol statistics.
This command allows you to view a list of connections maintained by the host and
their status. The command also allows you to check the IP, TCP, and UDP packet
statistics and error conditions.
Table C-4 lists the options of the netstat(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.

Table C-4 netstat(1M) command options

Option Description Application

-i Displays the interface status. The Allows you to view a concise

displayed content includes overview of the network status.
information on incoming and
outgoing packets, incoming and
outgoing errors, collisions, and
queues.

Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 331

 Table C-4 netstat(1M) command options (continued)
Option Description Application

-i interval Executes the netstat(1M) command Identifies intermittent or long-term

at the interval of the number of network events. You can view
seconds specified with a numeric nighttime events at a glance by
value after the -i option. piping the netstat output to a file.
-p Displays the media table. Allows you to check the MAC
addresses of the host on the
subnetwork.
-r Displays the routing table. Allows you to check the routing
information.
-n Converts a host name into an IP Allows you to check the IP address
address and then displays it. instead of the host name.

The following example shows the output from the netstat(1M) command.

# netstat -p
Net to Media Table: IPv4
Device IP Address Mask Flags Phys Addr
------ -------------------- --------------- -------- ---------------
net0 4S-111-D0 255.255.255.255 SPLA b0:99:28:98:30:36
net0 10.24.187.1 255.255.255.255 00:0a:b8:50:cd:42
net0 224.0.0.22 255.255.255.255 S 01:00:5e:00:00:16

Net to Media Table: IPv6

If Physical Address Type State Destination/Mask
----- ----------------- ------- ------------ ---------------------------
net0 33:33:00:00:00:01 other REACHABLE ff02::1
net0 33:33:00:00:00:02 other REACHABLE ff02::2
net0 33:33:00:01:00:02 other REACHABLE ff02::1:2
net0 33:33:00:00:00:16 other REACHABLE ff02::16
net0 b0:99:28:98:30:36 local REACHABLE fe80::b299:28ff:fe98:3036
net0 33:33:ff:98:30:36 other REACHABLE ff02::1:ff98:3036

C.5 ping(1M) Command

The ping(1M) command sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to network hosts.
In certain configurations of the ping(1M) command, the command output allows you
to identify a network link or a node that has experienced a problem. The destination
host is specified by the variable: hostname.
Table C-5 lists the options of the ping(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.

332 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Table C-5 ping(1M) command options
Option Description Application

hostname When you send a probe packet to Allows you to confirm that a host is
hostname, a message is returned. active on the network.
-g hostname Forces the probe packet to go Allows you to test the quality of
through the specified gateway. individual routes by sending
packets to the target host via the
various specified routes.
-i interface Specifies the interface to be used for Allows you to easily check the
sending and receiving a probe secondary network interface.
packet.
-n Converts a host name into an IP Allows you to check the IP address
address and then displays it. instead of the host name.
-s ping is repeated at intervals of 1 Allows you to check intermittent or
second. long-term network events. You can
Pressing the [Ctrl] + [C] keys stops view nighttime network events at a
ping, and then displays the statistics. glance by piping the ping output to
a file.
-svR Displays the routes that probe Displays the routes and hop counts
packets have passed through at an of probe packets, allowing you to
interval of 1 second. compare multiple routes to identify
any bottleneck.

The following example shows the output from the ping(1M) command.

# ping -s 10.24.187.50
PING 10.24.187.50: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=0. time=0.555 ms
64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=1. time=0.400 ms
64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=2. time=0.447 ms
^C
----10.24.187.50 PING Statistics----
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max/stddev = 0.400/0.467/0.555/0.079
#

C.6 ps(1) Command

The ps(1) command displays a list of process statuses. When no options are specified,
the command outputs information on those processes that have the same execution
user ID as the user executing the command and the same control terminal.
If you specify an option, output information is controlled by the option.
Table C-6 lists the options of the ps(1) command and how those options are useful for
troubleshooting.

Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 333

 Table C-6 ps(1) command options
Option Description Application

-e Displays information on various Allows you to view the process IDs

processes. and files that can be executed.
-f Generates a complete list. Allows you to view process
information such as the user ID, the
parent process ID, the execution
time, and the paths to the executed
files.
-o option Selects any items from those that Allows you to check only the most
can be configured as outputs. The important information. By
pid, pcpu, pmem, and comm determining the resource usage
options display the process ID, CPU rate, you can identify those
usage, memory usage, and processes that could potentially
corresponding executable files, affect the system performance or
respectively. even cause a hang up.

The following example shows the output from the ps(1) command.

# ps -eo pcpu,pid,comm|sort -rn

%CPU PID COMMAND
0.0 674 sort
0.0 673 ps
0.0 637 -bash
0.0 636 login
0.0 634 /usr/sbin/in.telnetd
0.0 629 -bash
0.0 613 /usr/bin/login
0.0 602 /usr/lib/devchassis/devchassisd
0.0 600 /opt/SUNWldm/bin/ldmd
0.0 581 /usr/lib/inet/in.ndpd
0.0 580 /sbin/dhcpagent
0.0 577 /usr/lib/rmvolmgr
0.0 548 /usr/sbin/auditd
0.0 519 /usr/sbin/syslogd
0.0 508 /usr/lib/ssh/sshd
0.0 497 /usr/lib/fm/fmd/fmd
0.0 487 /usr/lib/hal/hald-addon-cpufreq
0.0 472 /usr/lib/autofs/automountd
0.0 470 /usr/lib/autofs/automountd
0.0 468 /usr/lib/inet/inetd
0.0 458 hald-runner
0.0 453 /usr/lib/hal/hald
0.0 450 /usr/sbin/rpcbind
0.0 421 /usr/lib/inet/proftpd
0.0 413 /usr/sbin/cron
0.0 382 /lib/svc/method/iscsid
0.0 369 /usr/lib/efcode/sparcv9/efdaemon
0.0 332 /usr/sbin/nscd
0.0 297 /usr/lib/picl/picld
0.0 272 /lib/inet/nwamd
0.0 179 /usr/lib/devfsadm/devfsadmd

334 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 0.0 176 /usr/lib/zones/zonestatd
0.0 171 /usr/lib/ldoms/drd
0.0 164 /usr/lib/ldoms/ldmad
0.0 161 /usr/lib/utmpd
0.0 158 /usr/lib/dbus-daemon
0.0 128 /usr/lib/sysevent/syseventd
0.0 112 /usr/lib/pfexecd
0.0 98 /lib/inet/in.mpathd
0.0 74 /lib/crypto/kcfd
0.0 73 /lib/inet/ipmgmtd
0.0 59 /usr/sbin/dlmgmtd
0.0 38 /lib/inet/netcfgd
0.0 13 /lib/svc/bin/svc.configd
0.0 11 /lib/svc/bin/svc.startd
0.0 8 vmtasks
0.0 7 intrd
0.0 6 kmem_task
0.0 5 zpool-rpool
0.0 3 fsflush
0.0 2 pageout
0.0 1 /usr/sbin/init
0.0 0 sched
#

C.7 prstat(1M) Command

The prstat(1M) command repeatedly tests all the active processes on the system, and
provides statistics based on the specified output mode and sorting order. The output
from the prstat(1M) command is similar to that from the ps(1) command.
Table C-7 lists the options of the prstat(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.

Table C-7 prstat(1M) command options

Option Description Application

No options Displays a list of processes sorted in The output allows you to view
descending order of CPU resource process IDs, the User IDs, memory
consumption. The list is restricted usage, status, CPU usage, and
by the height of the terminal command names.
window and the number of
processes. The output is automatically
updated every 5 seconds, and is
stopped by pressing the [Ctrl] + [C]
keys.
-n number Restricts the number of lines in the Limits the amount of displayed
output. data, so that you can identify those
processes that are consuming
excessive amounts of resources.

Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 335

 Table C-7 prstat(1M) command options (continued)
Option Description Application

-s key Sorts the list by key parameter. The list can be sorted by cpu
(default), time, and size.
-v Displays the information in detailed Allows you to view other
mode. parameters.

The following example shows the output from the prstat(1M) command.

# prstat -n 5 -s size
PID USERNAME SIZE RSS STATE PRI NICE TIME CPU PROCESS/NLWP
497 root 55M 49M sleep 59 0 0:01:12 0.0% fmd/37
600 root 41M 36M sleep 59 0 0:09:13 0.0% ldmd/13
11 root 37M 33M sleep 59 0 0:00:17 0.0% svc.startd/12
468 root 24M 12M sleep 59 0 0:00:00 0.0% inetd/4
13 root 20M 19M sleep 59 0 0:00:37 0.0% svc.configd/24
Total: 49 processes, 669 lwps, load averages: 0.05, 0.05, 0.04
#

336 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
Appendix D

External Interface Specifications

This appendix describes the specifications of the external interface connectors and the
switch for the XSCF provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box.

The external interface connectors provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S are as follows.
■ Serial Port
■ USB Port
■ SAS Port
The external interface connectors provided on the crossbar box are as follows.
■ Serial Port
■ USB Port
The switch for the XSCF that is provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S will be as
follows:
■ RESET Switch

D.1 Serial Port

Table D-1 lists the specifications of the serial ports of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
the crossbar box.

Table D-1 Serial port

Pin arrangement Pin Signal Input/output Description
number name

1 RTS Output Transmission request

2 DTR Output Data terminal ready
3 TXD Output Transmitted data
4 GND --- Ground
5 GND --- Ground

337
 Table D-1 Serial port (continued)
Pin arrangement Pin Signal Input/output Description
number name

6 RXD Input Received data

7 DSR Input Data set ready
8 CTS Input Transmission possible

D.1.1 Wire connection chart for serial cables

Figure D-1 Wire connection chart for serial cables

D.2 USB Port

Table D-2 lists the specifications of the USB port of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the
crossbar box.

Table D-2 USB port

Pin arrangement Pin Signal Input/output Description
number name

1 VBUS Output Power supply

2 -DATA Input/ Data
output
3 +DATA Input/ Data
output
4 GND --- Ground

338 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
D.3 SAS Port
The SAS port of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is used to connect external devices with
an SAS interface, such as a tape drive. The chassis has one SAS port on the rear.
Consult a service engineer for more information about compatible devices.

D.4 RESET Switch

The RESET switch of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is an emergency switch to restart the
XSCF. For how to use the RESET switch, see "17.2 Notes on Using RESET Switch" in
the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
Figure D-2 indicates the RESET switch location of the SPARC M10-4 while Figure D-3
indicates the RESET switch location of the SPARC M10-4S. The RESET switch (A in
the figure) is located on the rear of the chassis.

Figure D-2 RESET switch location (SPARC M10-4)

Appendix D External Interface Specifications 339

 Figure D-3 RESET switch location (SPARC M10-4S)

340 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015
 Index

A M
active maintenance, 32 maintenance, types, 31

C O
cable, types of, 29 Oracle Solaris, 323
component list, 315
component specifications, 317 P
components, names and locations of, 9 PCI Express card, 181
CPU memory unit, 195 physical partition, powering off, 71
crossbar unit, 299 physical partition, powering on, 113
power supply unit, 277
E PSU backplane unit, 281
emergency power off, 7
entire system, starting, 114 S
entire system, stopping, 73 system, restoring, 89
external interface, 337 system-stopped maintenance, 34

F T
failure, identifying, 39 tags, 2
fan unit, 273 troubleshooting commands, 323

I W
inactive maintenance, 33 warning labels, 2
internal disk, 265
X
L XSCF BB control cable, 305
labels, 2 XSCF DUAL control cable, 311
LED indications, 24

341
342 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ March 2015